WATER POLLUTION CONTROL RESEARCH SERIES 11024DOC07/71
   Storm Water Management  Model
      Volume I—Final Report

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY • WATER QUALITY OFFICE

-------
                   WATER POLLUTION CONTROL RESEARCH SERIES
The Water Pollution Control Research Reports describe the results and progress
in the control and abatement of pollution of our Nation's waters.  They provide
a central source of information on the research, development and demonstration
activities of the Water Quality Office of the Environmental Protection Agency,
through in-house research and grants and contracts with the Federal, State
and local agencies, research institutions, and industrial organizations.

Previously issued reports on the. Storm and Combined Sewer Pollution Control
Program:
11023 FDB 09/70
11024 FKJ 10/70
11024 EJC 10/70

11023 	 12/70
11023 DZF 06/70
11024 EJC 01/71
11020 FAQ 03/71
11022 EFF 12/70

11022 EFF 01/71
11022 DPP 10/70
11024 EQG 03/71

11020 FAL 03/71
11024 FJE 04/71
Chemical Treatment of Combined Sewer Overflows
In-Sewer Fixed Screening of Combined Sewer Overflows
Selected Urban Storm Water Abstracts, First Quarterly
Issue
Urban Storm Runoff and Combined Sewer Overflow Pollution
Ultrasonic Filtration of Combined Sewer Overflows
Selected Urban Runoff Abstracts, Second Quarterly Issue
Dispatching System for Control of Combined Sewer Losses
Prevention and Correction of Excessive Infiltration and
Inflow into Sewer Systems - A Manual of Practice
Control of Infiltration and Inflow into Sewer Systems
Combined Sewer Temporary Underwater Storage Facility
Storm Water Problems and Control in Sanitary Sewers -
Oakland and Berkeley, California
Evaluation of Storm Standby Tanks - Columbus, Ohio
Selected Urban Storm Water Runoff Abstracts, Third
Quarterly Issue
                                        To be continued on inside back cover...

-------
               STORM WATER  MANAGEMENT MODEL
                    Volume I - Final  Report
                               by

         Metcalf  & Eddy, Inc., Palo  Alto,  California
         University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida
  Water Resources Engineers, Inc., Walnut  Creek, California
                             for the
                 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
         Contract No. 14-12-501
         Contract No. 14-12-502
         Contract No. 14-12-503
Project No.  11024EBI
Project No.  11024DOC
Project No.  11024EBJ
                            July  1971
For sate by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, B.C. 20402 - Price $2.75
                        Stock Number 5501-0100

-------
                 EPA Review Notice
This report has been reviewed by the Water Quality Office,
EPA, and approved for publication.   Approval does not signi-
fy that the contents necessarily reflect the views and poli-
cies of the Environmental Protection Agency, nor does mention
of trade names or commercial products constitute endorsement
or recommendation for use.
                              ii

-------
                                ABSTRACT
     A comprehensive mathematical model,  capable of representing urban
storm water runoff, has been developed to assist administrators  and en-
gineers in the planning, evaluation,  and  management of overflow  abate-
ment alternatives.

     Hydrographs and pollutographs (time  varying quality concentrations
or mass values) were generated for real storm events and systems from
points of origin in real time sequence to points of disposal (including
travel in receiving waters)  with user options for intermediate storage
and/or treatment facilities.  Both combined and separate sewerage systems
may be evaluated.  Internal cost routines and receiving water quality out-
put assisted in direct cost-benefit analysis of alternate programs of
water quality enhancement.

     Demonstration and verification runs  on selected catchments, varying
in size from 180 to 5,400 acres, in four  U.S. cities (approximately 20
storm events, total) were used to test and debug the model.  The amount
of pollutants released varied significantly with the real time occurrence,
runoff intensity duration, pre-storm history, land use, and maintenance.
Storage-treatment combinations offered best cost-effectiveness ratios.

     A user's manual and complete program listing were prepared.

     THi's report was submitted in fulfillment of Projects 11024 EBI, DOC,
and EBJ under Contracts 14-12-501, 502, and 503 under the sponsorship of
the Environmental Protection Agency.

     The  titles and identifying  numbers of  the final report volumes are:

               Title                           EPA Report No.

     STORM WATER MANAGEMENT  MODEL              11024 DOC 07/71
      Volume I - Final Report

     STORM WATER MANAGEMENT  MODEL              11024 DOC 08/71
      Volume II -  Verification  and Testing

     STORM WATER MANAGEMENT  MODEL              11024 DOC 09/71
      Volume III - User's Manual

     STORM WATER MANAGEMENT  MODEL              11024 DOC 10/71
      Volume IV -  Program Listing
                                   ill

-------
                               CONTENTS
Section                                                           Page
    1    Conclusions and Recommendations                            1
    2    Introduction                                              11
                      PART 1 - COMPREHENSIVE MODEL
    3    Model Overview                                            21
    4    Programming Considerations                                39
               PART 2 - QUANTITY (HYDROLOGIC) SUBROUTINES
    5    Surface Runoff Quantity Model                             51
    6    Dry Weather Flow Quantity Model                           77
    7    Infiltration Model                                        95
    8    Transport Model                                          111
    9    Storage Model                                            139
   10    Receiving Water Quantity Model                           157
                      PART 3 - QUALITY SUBROUTINES
   11    Surface Runoff Quality Model                             173
   12    Dry Weather Flow Quality Model                           201
   13    Decay Model                                              213
   14    Receiving Water Quality Model                            231
   15    Treatment Model                                          245
                         PART 4 - ECONOMIC DATA
   16    Cost-Effectiveness Model                                 289
           PART 5 - ACKNOWLEDGMENTS, REFERENCES, PUBLICATIONS,
               GLOSSARY AND ABBREVIATIONS, AND APPENDICES
   17    Acknowledgments                                          307
   18    References                                               311
   19    Publications                                             323
   20    Glossary and Abbreviations                               329
   21    Appendices                                               333

-------
                                FIGURES
3-3      Overview of Model Structure
INTRODUCTION
2-1      Activity Chart
MODEL OVERVIEW

3-1      Schematic System Drawing Rainfall through                 25
         Overflow

3-2      Typical Storage-Treatment Applications to                 26
         Limit Untreated Overflows
                                                                   30
3-4      Bloody Run Drainage Basin, Cincinnati Dry                 33
         Weather Flow Results

3-5      Cincinnati Combined Sewer Overflow Results -              34
         Storm of April 1, 1970, Sampling Point 3
PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS

4-1      Master Programming Routine                                43


SURFACE RUNOFF QUANTITY MODEL

5-1      Definition of a Drainage System                           58

5-2      Flow Chart, Hydrographic Computation                      60

5-3      Typical Chicago 10-Acre Tract Drainage Basin              64

5-4      Rainfall Hyetograph and Calculated Runoff                 66
         Hydrographs, Chicago 10-Acre Tract

5-5      Calculated and Observed Runoff Hydrographs,               68
         Oakdale  (Chicago)

5-6      Northwood  (Baltimore) Drainage Basin Plan                 70

5-7      Calculated and Observed Runoff Hydrographs,               72
         Northwood  (Baltimore)
                                    VI

-------
                          FIGURES (continued)
                                                                 Page

5-8      Effect of Coarsening Subcatchment System,                  74
         Northwood (Baltimore)
DRY WEATHER FLOW QUANTITY MODEL

6-1      Determination of Subcatchment and Identification          82
         Data to Estimate Sewage at 8 Points

6-2      Test Results, Bradenton (Florida) Gaging Area             89

6-3      Test Results, Valley Wood, Alvy, and Falcon               90
         (California) Gaging Areas

6-4      Test Results, Nutwood (Maryland) Gaging Area              91

6-5      Test Results, Pine Valley (Maryland) Gaging Area          92

6-6      Test Results, Springfield (Missouri) Gaging Area          93


INFILTRATION MODEL

7-1      Typical Drainage Basin in which Infiltration              98
         is to be Estimated

7-2      Components of Infiltration                               102

7-3      Prescribed Melting Period                                105

7-4      Rate of Melting                                          106

7-5      Test Results, Pine Valley (Maryland)                     108


TRANSPORT MODEL

8-1      Sewer Schematic for the Kingman  Lake                     120
         (Washington, D.C.) Study Area

8-2      Finite Difference Definition Sketch for Element M,       122
         Routing through All Elements at  Each Time-Step

8-3      Normalized  Flow-Area  Relationship  for Uniform Flow       125

8-4      Typical Implementation of a Backwater Element            131

8-5      Comparison  of Transport Model  and  Exact Solutions        134
         for Pipeline Consisting of  8 Conduit Lengths
                                   vii

-------
                         FIGURES  (continued)
                                                                  Page

8-6      Comparison of Transport Model and Exact Solutions         135
         for Pipeline Consisting of 15 Conduit Lengths

8-7      Hypothetical Input for Routing Comparisons                136

8-8      Comparison of Transport Model with Exact Solution         137
         of Ackers and Harrison
STORAGE MODEL

9-1      Outfall Storage, Selby Street, San Francisco              150

9-2      Hydrograph Modifications Produced by Outfall              153
         Storage, Selby Street, San Francisco

9-3      Modifications to BOD Concentration Produced by            154
         Outfall Storage, Selby Street, San Francisco

9-4      Modifications to Suspended Solids Concentration           155
         Produced by Outfall Storage, Selby Street, San
         Francisco
RECEIVING WATER QUANTITY MODEL

10-1     Geometric Representation of a Receiving Water             164

10-2     Test System Flows Showing Hydrograph Effects              172


SURFACE RUNOFF QUALITY MODEL

11-1     BOD and SS Test Results for Combined Sewers,              197
         Laguna Street, San Francisco

11-2     Total Coliform Test Results for Combined Sewers           198


DECAY MODEL

13-1     Schematic Drawing of Test Areas, Combined Sewer           222
         (Numbered),  Selby Street, San Francisco

13-2     Results of Sensitivity Runs for Rate Constant             223
         for Decay (Dl),  Storms of November 6 and 14

13-3     Bed Load in Conduit 72, Storm of November 6,              225
         DWDAY = 1
                                  Vlll

-------
                         FIGURES  (continued)
                                                                 Page

13-4     Bed Load in Conduit 72,  Storm of November  6,              226
         DWDAY =47

13-5     Bed Load in Conduit 72,  Storm of November  14,             227
         DWDAY = 1.0
RECEIVING WATER QUALITY MODEL

14-1     Advective Transport Phenomena                             236

14-2     Input to Node 14 of Test System                           241

14-3     Receiving Water Quality Model Results for Node 14         243
         of Test System


TREATMENT MODEL

15-1     Treatment Model                                           250

15-2     Treatment of Overflows by Sedimentation Tanks             257

15-3     Microstrainer at Callowhill (Philadelphia),                269
         Mark 0 Screen Cloth

15-4     Microstrainer Capacity, Mark 0 Screen Cloth               271

15-5     Microstrainer Capacity at 30-Inch Head Loss,              273
         Mark 0 Screen Cloth


APPENDIX A, INFILTRATION MODEL

A-l      Comparison of Predicted and Measured.Flows, M&E           341
         Study, Glen Street  (Berkeley, California) Subarea


APPENDIX B, DECAY MODEL

B-l      Sieve Analysis Plot for Sewer Sediment                    349

B-2      Circular Channel Section                                  351

B-3      Rectangular Channel Section                               352
                                   IX

-------
                                 TABLES

                                                                  Page

INTRODUCTION

2-1      Component Task Categories and Assignments                  15


MODEL OVERVIEW

3-1      General Data Requirements, Storm Water Management          36
         Model


PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS
4-1      Representative Values of Core Capacities Used in           47
         the Demonstration Runs

4-2      Sample Compile and Execution Times on Demonstration        49
         Runs
DRY WEATHER FLOW QUANTITY MODEL

6-1      Allowable Number of Sewer Connections by City Size         83
         and Geographic Location

6-2      Actual and Estimated Daily Average Residential             88
         Sanitary Sewer Flows to Test Validity of
         Subroutine FILTH
STORAGE MODEL
9-1      Storage Model Input Data, Sewer Storage Basin,            151
         Selby Street, San Francisco
SURFACE RUNOFF QUALITY MODEL

11-1     Estimated Annual Runoff of Pollutants from                180
         Cincinnati Area

11-2     Daily Dust and Dirt Accumulation in Chicago Area          181

11-3     Efficiency of Street Sweeping in Chicago Area             184

-------
                          TABLES  (continued)


DRY WEATHER FLOW QUALITY MODEL

12-1     Comparison of Quality Constituents of Ground              206
         Garbage with Sewage

12-2     Comparison of Quality Constituents with Family            206
         Income

12-3     Estimated Typical Wastewater Flow and Characteristics      207
DECAY MODEL

13-1     Test Results Using FMC Project Data, Bed Load             228
         Analysis for 18-Inch Sewer with a Length of
         795 Feet
COST-EFFECTIVENESS MODEL

16-1     Treatment Processes                                       293

16-2     Treatment Cost Summary                                    297

16-3     Irreducible Maintenance Costs                             301

16-4     Storm Event Costs                                         302

16-5     Default Values for Cost Subroutines                       303

16-6     Sample Test Runs                                          305
                                   xi

-------
                             SECTION 1




                  CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
CONCLUSIONS                                                        3




    Capabilities of the Model                                      3




    Applications of the Model                                      5




    Limitations of the Model                                       6




    Results of Demonstration-Verification Studies                  7




RECOMMENDATIONS                                                    8

-------
                             SECTION 1




                   CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS






CONCLUSIONS




Under the sponsorship of the Environmental Protection Agency a




consortium of contractors—Metcalf & Eddy, Inc., the University of




Florida, and Water Resources Engineers, inc.—has developed a com-




prehensive mathematical model capable of representing urban storm water




runoff and combined sewer overflow phenomena.  Correctional devices in




the form of user selected options for storage and/or treatment are




provided with associated estimates of cost.  Effectiveness is portrayed




by computed treatment efficiencies and modeled changes in receiving




water quality.






Capabilities of the Model




1. The Storm Water Management Model accepts any rainfall hyetograph or




multiple hyetographs (where several local rain gages are recording the




same storm event)  and produces a runoff hydrograph for each modeled




watershed.






2. Continuous runoff quality graphs, called pollutographs, are computed




on the basis of the volume of storm runoff and on antecedent conditions




which include rainfall history, street sweeping data, land use, and




related data.






3. Hydrographs and pollutographs are computed for dry weather flows (in




the case of combined systems) with daily and hourly variations and for




infiltration.

-------
 4.  Peal  time  flow  routing  is  accomplished through  a simulation of the




 physical  collection  system allowing  for variations in size, length,




 slope, and cross-section configuration in the  case of conduits and




 locations and design parameters  for  non-conduits.






 5.  User options  for  storage facilities may be  internal  (in-system) or




 external  (located  at the overflow point).  Options for  storage are:




    a. Surface storage




    b. Intrasystem storage




    c. Flow rerouting




    d. Underground storage




    e. Underwater  storage.






 6. User options  for  treatment may be called in conjunction with or




 independent of external storage.  The following treatment options and




 acceptable combinations of these options are provided:




    a. Mechanically  cleaned bar racks




    b. Fine screens




    c. Sedimentation




    d. Dissolved air flotation




    e. Microstrainers




    f. High rate filters




    g. Effluent screens




    h. Chlorination.






7. Receiving water effects in both flow and quality are computed for




simulated lakes, rivers, or estuaries as applicable.

-------
8. Capital costs and operation and maintenance costs are computed for




the options selected to permit the development of approximate cost-




effectiveness curves which can be used for decision making.






Applications of the Model




1. The Storm Water Management Model is written in FORTRAN programming




language with a minimum of machine-dependent features.  To date the




program has been tested on four independent computer hardware systems.






2. The computer hardware system should be the equivalent of the




IBM 360/65 with peripheral storage devices and a usable core capacity




of not less than 350K bytes.






3. The Model is developed on a general basis so it may be applied to




any municipality by changing only the input data.  The approximate size




range of drainage basins over which the Model is applicable is from




10 acres to 5,000 acres.






4. A "User's Manual," Volume III, is furnished describing the main




computer program, all subroutines, data input and output, and complete




instructions on applications to individual systems.






5. The user should be knowledgeable in FORTRAN programming, operating




systems interfacing, and the engineering aspects of the real systems.






6. Data requirements are common to engineering design and analysis and




are mainly descriptive of•the real systems.

-------
 Limitations  of  the Model




 1.   Data  analyses and  interpretation are essential.






 2.   in  its present form only one drainage basin is studied during a compu-




 tational  run.   Thus, the combined effects of multiple coincident discharges




 into a  single receiving water body are not directly evaluated.  However,




 the  multiple discharge effect can be simulated by executing a series of




 runs (one per basin up to a maximum of 20), creating an output master




 file of the  discharge solutions, and then applying this master file as




 input to  the Receiving Water Model.






 3.   Quality  and perhaps quantity variations due to geographical or seasonal




 differences  are inadequately documented due to the sparsity of equivalent




 real system  data.






 4.   Costs and treatment data in many instances are based on advanced




 processes which have not been in operation beyond the pilot plant or




 limited demonstration plant stage.  The cost-effectiveness of the treat-




 ment alternatives should then be viewed in the light of this limitation.






 5.   The program, being completely new and of considerable size, will




 require much use and continuous modification to fulfill most effectively




 its  objective of providing a decision-making tool.






 6.   The Model, as structured, does not optimize to a specific solution,




but  rather provides a comprehensive analysis of user selected alternatives.






 7.   The present Model simulates individual storm events which may or may




not represent the random occurrence and probabilistic nature of the real

-------
hydrologic phenomena.  However, subject to fund limitations,  any number




of independent storms may be run separately to support such analyses.






Results of Demonstration-Verification Studies




1.  The real time occurrence of the storm event (hour of the day)  signi-




ficantly affects the quality of combined sewer overflows.






2.  The intensity-duration relationships of the runoff (i.e., the shape




of the hydrograph), as well as the total runoff amount, must be considered




in evaluating combined sewer overflow abatement alternatives.






3.  Idealized "design storms"  (i.e., the traditional 2-year, 5-year, and




10-year storm) may give a poor representation of the quality character-




istics of overflows by failing to represent the time of occurrence and




shape of the hydrograph.






4.  The use of real storm data "design event(s)," together with surface




and system simulation in the EPA Storm Water Management Model, offer a




means of significantly improved characterization of particular drainage




basins.






5.  The first flush effect is a function of the antecedent dry weather




flow, the transport system geometry, and the design event.   The dry




weather flow provides the source, the transport system determines




location and rate of solids accumulation, and the design event determines




the rate of uptake and travel  time to the overflow point.






6.  Quality concentrations alone are not adequate indicators of the pol-




lution potential of combined sewer overflows and storm water discnarges

-------
 because of the high variation in flow rates during design events.   Mass




 (flow times concentration)  discharge rates are generally more significant




 for the long term effects,  and concentrations are perhaps more significant




 for the short term shock effects.







 7.   The areal distribution  of rainfall can significantly influence runoff




 quality.







 8.   For the demonstration situations modeled,  the combination of storage




 followed by high  rate  treatment offered the best  cost-effectiveness  ratios.




 Since  generally only single  storms were modeled,  the  study was not pursued




 to  determine the  most  favorable ratios between storage  and treatment




 capacities.







 9.   The dynamic modeling  of  the receiving  waters  permits  the  evaluation




 of  the  transient  load  problem as well  as the pollutant  effects averaged




 out to  steady  state conditions.







 RE COMMEN DATIONS




 1.   It is recommended, above  all else,  that the Storm Water Management




Model be put to work on real  systems with  real problems.   The  use,




evaluation, and continuous updating of  the  Model  are  essential to  its




credibility and effectiveness.







2.   It is recommended that the Model be used in the research and develop-




ment of representative storm events based upon years  of rainfall record




to provide an economical base for evaluating alternate courses  of  correc-




tive action.

-------
3.  It is recommended that the Model be further developed to encompass




the effects of multiple coincident discharges to common receiving waters.




Storm and combined sewer, treatment plant, tributary stream, and other




significant discharges should be considered.  For economy, a correlation




of overflows from non-modeled watersheds with a limited number of modeled




representative areas should be established as a basis for extrapolation.




Such development would be directed toward a truer measure of water quality




improvement accompanying specific steps of corrective action.







4.  It is recommended that data gathering efforts be continued to improve




the definition of waste sources and the removals induced by urban storm




water runoff, including the extension to additional quality constituents.






5.  It is recommended that the Model be used in conjunction with Demon-




stration Projects for advanced combined sewer overflow waste treatment




processes to assist in the evaluation and optimization of their design




and operation.







6.  Finally, it is recommended that the Storm Water Management Model be




used as a control guide in setting up procedures for the  retention,




redistribution, treatment, and release of excess flows resulting from




storm events at the time of occurrence.

-------
                              SECTION 2




                            INTRODUCTION




                                                                   Page




PROJECT CONCEPTION                                                  13




STATEMENT OF WORK                                                   14




     Objective A, Intent                                            14




     Objective A, Tasks and Assignments                             14




     Objective B, Intent                                            16




     Objective B, Assignments                                       16




METHOD OF APPROACH                                                  17




PRESENTATION FORMAT                                                 17
                                   11

-------
                               SECTION 2

                             INTRODUCTION


An expenditure of billions of dollars is expected in the next decade in

the United States to combat the degradation of streams and other bodies

of water by pollutants discharged through combined sewer overflows or

separate storm sewer discharges.  The Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) is therefore directing or assisting in multiple research and

development programs and investigations to identify, control, and correct

known problems relating to these storm occurrences.


One of these research programs, the development and testing of a compre-

hensive simulation model to represent completely storm event phenomena

in urban areas, is the subject of this report.


PROJECT CONCEPTION

In April 1967, Metcalf & Eddy, Inc., (MSB) submitted a proposal envision-

ing the use of systems engineering techniques to identify storm and sani-

tary flows and characteristics, conveyance systems, and the pollutional

effects of storm water upon the environment.  This and earlier proposals,

related in subject matter, by the University of Florida (UP) and Water

Resources Engineers, Inc., (WRE), upon review and evaluation by the EPA's

Storm and Comoined Sewer Pollution Control Branch, led to the concept of

the comprehensive mathematical model.  As evolved this model would represent

     "...urban storm water runoff phenomena, both quantity
     and quality, from the onset of precipitation on the basin,
     through collection, conveyance, storage, and treatment
     systems, to points downstream from outfalls which are
     significantly affected by storm discharges."


                                   13

-------
The goal was to provide a fundamental tool for administrators and




designers to assist them in the management and allocation of resources




towards optimal storm water quality control.  Because the model was to




be universal in its application and all-encompassing in its detail, and




because the duration of the project was restricted to 18 months, a




cooperative effort drawing upon the talents and resources of all three




contractors and the EPA was decided upon.  A demonstration-verification




phase was incorporated into the work to insure the validity of the




results and the utility of its application.







STATEMENT OF WORK
Objective A, Intent




The first objective, model development, involved several component tasks.




The goal of each task involving simulation  (mathematical modeling) was




to provide a computer program subroutine which could be directly applied




to the comprehensive model.  All subroutines were designed to be




dynamic, reflecting time and space variations.  All previous data in




each task area were examined, evaluated, and used if suitable.  No




sampling was performed.  All subroutines were developed on a general




basis so they could be applied to any municipality by changing only the




input data.  A sub-basin, multi-level branched system concept was used.




The model was designed to be applicable over drainage basins from 10 to




5,000 acres, and to be operational on the Department of the Interior




computation facilities.






Objective A, Tasks and Assignments




Table 2--1 summarizes the component task categories and assignments.






                                   14

-------
        Table 2-1.  COMPONENT TASK CATEGORIES AND ASSIGNMENTS
	Tasks	Assignment
MANAGEMENT
1.  Be responsible for overall coordination and management      M&E
2.  Be responsible for final development of the compre-
    hensive model                                               M&E
3.  Participate in coordination meetings and provide
    consultation and guidance                                 UP - WRE
QUANTITY (HYDROLOGIC) SUBROUTINES
1.  Develop urban runoff model                                  WRE
2.  Develop simulation model for dry weather sewage flows       UF
3.  Develop infiltration model                                  UF
4.  Develop transport model, simulating the branched
    collection system and main sewer                            UF
5.  Develop storage simulation model                            M&E
6.  Develop receiving water flow model for creek, river,
    estuary or lake                                             WRE
QUALITY SUBROUTINES to be integrated with associated quantity
                     (hydrologic) subroutines
1.  Develop runoff quality model                                MSB
2.  Develop dry weather flow quality model                      MfiE
3.  Develop decay model quality routing in transport model      UF
4.  Develop receiving water quality model                       WRE
5.  Develop treatment simulation model                          M&E
ECONOMIC DATA
1.  Develop cost model for approximating cost-effectiveness
    curves                                                      M&E
                                    15

-------
 Under Objective A, M&E provided overall direction and coordination




 of the project and developed  subroutines representing the quality aspects




 of storm water runoff and  DWF; all  storage and  treatment options; and




 a  cost model  representing  these options.  UF developed subroutines




 representing  DWF  quantity  and infiltration; the transport simulation,




 both  quantity and quality;  and the  decay of constituents in transport.




 WRE developed subroutines  representing urban storm water runoff quantity




 phenomena;  and all receiving  waters,  both quantity and quality.  EPA




 furnished available process and cost  data on the storage and treatment




 options.







 Objective B,  Intent




 The second  objective, demonstration-verification, was to test the validity




 of the Model  by applying it to several storm and combined sewer drain-




 age basins.   Possible solutions to  existing problems were proposed by




 manipulating  flow control  and treatment alternatives in  the Model.




 The apparent  best solutions based upon cost-effectiveness were indicated,




 disregarding  sociopolitical factors.






Objective B, Assignments




M&E continued coordination of the overall project, conducted all computer




runs of the comprehensive Model and associated data reduction to proper




card/tape input form, and was responsible for demonstrating the operation




of the program on the EPA computer.  WRE and UF provided necessary




analysis of computer output and refined and debugged their respective




programs.  EPA made the initial contacts with the study municipalities




and provided the majority of  the raw data.







                                    16

-------
METHOD OF APPROACH




The activity chart used for project management and control is shown in




Figure 2-1.  An initial meeting and five subsequent quarterly meetings,




each of two days' duration, were jointly attended by all contractors




and the EPA to ensure coordination and direct transfer and critique of




information.







The computer language, FORTRAN IV, and primary hardware, IBM 360/65, were




selected as most compatible with Environmental Protection Agency require-




ments and universal acceptance.  To ensure high flexibility in the ultimate




program usage, some programs were developed and all were tested on a




UNIVAC 1108 as well as on the primary system.







The "triumvirate" approach enabled simultaneous starts in three prime




program areas—runoff, quality, and transport—and working routines




were well in hand by the six-month target date, permitting the first




comprehensive Model run at that time.







Use of real systems data was sought and integrated into each subroutine's




development, although in many instances the available data were far too




sparse and/or lacking in detail to be of maximum benefit.  Contacts with




demonstration municipalities in the third and fourth quarters enabled a




prompt start on verification activities upon completion of the first year




of work and final completion at the end of 18 months.






PRESENTATION FORMAT




The project report is divided into four volumes.  This volume, the "Final




Report," contains the background, justifications, judgments, and assumptions
                                   17

-------
                       I   INITIAL COORDINATION
                          MEETT!fG  START OF
                          MODELING PHASE
                          EPA, ME, WH, UF
                                                                                          PROJECT M AN AC. KM EN T. AMD COOHDWAT1OK ->
                       f  PREPARE t DBSEHINATE GUIDIlJhES FOR
DEFINE MANAGEMENT        \  DOCUMJEXTATK» 1 DATA MANAGEMENT - f
OBJECTIVES *      I          	'	——— 		-			
MQUIMMNTS  ME Lj
                                                                       MONITOR! IMPLEMENTATION -
                                                                               :VEU>P RECEIVING WATKR QUALITY *
                                                                                                                                   REPINE fc TEST - WR
                  rART l!P^
                   r-»*i
                                                    DEVELOP REd£rv&iC'''ATK:R QUANTITY MOO Ft -»
                             DEVELOP -  A?ERSHCD MCS1KL  WH       ,    BXTTNE 4 TEST WATERSHED MODEL - W*
                                               i, STORMWATER  i \ -X1UAUTY - HE
                                                 MODEL DWF     QUALITY - HE
                                                                                                         i     t OUrilNE PROJECT          DifAO, REPORT 4
                                                                                                         i    '  REPORT * MANUAL - "Jfy-y,  ^ANUAl^rCmMATS
IOTCKTO PROCEED]
t O»GAhI2ATK». Mi
                          EVELOPCENERAUZED MODE!) CONCEPTS - MRS  ,
                             V CC*n RECESSIVE ItOOEt  ME. V.R. UF
                             ...... ^^ ---- __ — ___j_, — ___. ------


                               '                 I
                               ,                I





1 MOPE; j UF.     ^\.f    REFINE t 1 ESI M RAMSfORT WODEi. • VT


                                               I

F MODEL - t'F                         REFINE i TEST  \J>. ¥ MCCEI   UF

  [
                                                                                                                                        ta MODELS  ME
                                                                                                            > i    !        1               i
                                                                                                            •S     RJ1FP.K COyPREHE?iS[V« MODgij
                                                                                                                              TORAGE MODEij - ME          jil




                                                                                                                              T REATMEMT MODEL . ME
                                                                                                                           R8FINI i TEST -
                           PREPARE 1 DtSSEMB-A
                 I PROJECT
                 START Utf
                 !  EPA
                                                                                     COLLECT i DEVELOP HEQIJIRED BASIN DATA IN U&A0LE FORM -
                                                                            ''4              5
                                                                             PROGRAM MONTHS
                                              Figure  2-1.     ACTIVITY   CHART
                                                                          18

-------
                c  QUARTERLY COOItKNATION
                ,.  MEETING. rrA»T!OFDEIIOK8THATK»i i
                '  PHAS8  EPA. MEjWB, UF         I
                                                        PTHAL MSKTTMG,  PREOEHTA'
                                                        Of RESULTS - EPA. HE, WB,
                     DRAFT WATERSHED ft RECEIVIKC WATER ASPECTS OF PROGRAM - WH
                        IAFT tJUAUTY, STORAGE, TREATMENT (i COST-EFTliCTIVKHESS

                        ~~~           ASPECTS OF'PROGRAM - ME
                        DRAFTTRW3PORT, DECAY, OTJ'F t giTII-TRATlOM AapECTS O
APPLY MOOEL TO SXL&CTKD
COMBINED SEWER BASINS
   - MS. WR, UF
                         DIVE LOij USER
                 \   TSCHNMVES -Jn. WR. UF
                 "~  "   "  --1—
                                                            ,              i DOCUMENT BEST
                                             ,  PROPOSE & TEST P^SSlBLt SOLOTtONS^ | SOHmoli8- »g

                                             j "~~"~    - ME, wntuF            ^            5

                                                            >              !             ''
                                                    DEMONSTRATE MANAGEMENT BENEFITS FROM
                                                    APPL.KAT1OTI TO REAL, SYSTEM -ffS, WH, UF
                       |/                            •             1  PMPARirOWL   t
                       •f IMPROVE KODEL uftLfTV - ME. WS, UrZ FWALIZE MODBL IbutPORT 4 MAXUAl, T^
                   APPLY MODEL T(|l SELECTED STOHM
                   SEWER BASINS - UZ, WS. UF      .  PROPOSE & TEST
                      LIAISON WITH JBASB* AOI
                                                                    ENVIRONMENTAL PPQTBCTIQN AGENCY

                                                                        CONTRACT 14 - 13 - W>

                                                                 inrORMWATER POLLUTIOM CO»*TBOL MANACESI


                                                                          ACTIVITY CHART
                        REV, NO. 1  MAR IT. 19>S


                               X?
                                PROGRAM MON
                                                                        PTffturfti try:  METCALF & EDDY
                                                                           Due: Man-h L. 1989
                                                                        For: DiWrllxaion M inlliaJ meeting
FIGURE   2-1.     ACTIVITY   CHART   (continued)
                                      19

-------
used in Model development.  It further includes descriptions of unsuccess-

ful modeling techniques that were attempted and recommendations for

forms of user teams to implement systems analysis techniques most

efficiently.


Volume II, "Verification and Testing," describes the methods and results

of Model application in four urban catchment areas:

                                                     Size,
                      Location                       acres
             Baker Street, San Francisco               187

             Bloody Run, Cincinnati                  2,600

             Kingman Lake, Washington, D.C.          4,200

             Wingohocking, Philadelphia              5,400


All are existing combined sewer areas which were tested with real time

storm events.  Primary Model verification was based on sampling and

investigations on the Bloody Run sewer carried out by the University of

Cincinnati in close association with this project.


Volume III, the "User's Manual," contains program descriptions, flow

charts, instructions on data preparation and program usage, and test

examples.


Volume IV, "Program Listing," lists the main program, all subroutines,

and Job Control Language (JCL) as used in the demonstration runs.
                                    20

-------
       PART I





COMPREHENSIVE MODEL

-------
                               SECTION 3




                            MODEL OVERVIEW




                                                                  Page





THE PROBLEM                                                        23




     Dry Weather Flow                                              2^




     Storm Water Runoff                                            24




     Combined Sewer Overflows                                      27




     Corrective Action                                             ^7




THE COMPREHENSIVE MODEL                                            28




MODEL APPLICATIONS                                                 31




     Users                                                         32




     Data Requirements                                             35




     Programming Costs                                             37
                                   21

-------
                               SECTION 3




                            MODEL OVERVIEW






The comprehensive Storm Water Management Model is intended to provide a




fundamental tool for modeling and evaluating existing phenomena associ-




ated with storm water runoff and combined sewer overflows from urban




areas and, through simulation, to indicate system responses to selected




means of corrective action.






THE PROBLEM




Precipitation falling on urban areas becomes contaminated as it enters




and passes through or within the human environment (Ref. 1).  The first




degradation comes from contact with pollutants in the air; the next,




through contacts as it passes over ground and building surfaces; and




finally, through contacts with residues  (depositions from early storms




or usage) and/or wastewaters  (DWF in combined systems) in the conveyance




system and appurtenances.  This storm runoff with or without sanitary




sewage picked up in transit, will eventually discharge to some receiving




body of water where the contaminants will be held for decomposition




(nonconservative constituents) or accumulation (conservative constituents),




or will be passed on downstream using the receiving waters as a carrier.






How serious is this contamination?  Where does it come from?  How does




it vary from one location to the next, or from one storm event to the




next?  How do the related phenomena interplay?  How can this contamination




be controlled?  How can alternate schemes of corrective action be




compared?  How much will they cost?  What will be their effects on the
                                   23

-------
receiving waters?  These are the basic questions that guided the develop-




ment of the comprehensive Storm Water Management Model.






Figure 3-1 shows in pictorial form the origins and movements of flows




in typical combined sewerage systems.  Figure 3-2 shows some of the




storage and treatment systems now under study to attack the problem to




protect and/or improve the quality of the receiving waters.






Dry Weather Flow




DWF is basically the wastewater discharge of a community diluted by such




infiltration, groundwater leakage into the conveyance system, as may




occur.  In volume it is comparatively small, averaging about 100 gal./




capita/day, but its pollutant concentrations are high, and if untreated,




a menace to the public health or environment.  DWF may be conveyed in




pipe systems which exclude storm waters (called separate systems) or in




systems which handle both DWF and storm water runoff  (called combined




systems).






Storm Water Runoff




Storm water runoff is the precipitation, striking a surface during a




storm event, which exceeds the infiltration capacity  (absorption into




the ground) or holding capacity (ponding)  of that surface.  This excess




flow is conveyed through systems of gutters and pipes which may be




separate or combined as described above.  In volume it may be very large,




frequently exceeding the rate of DWF discharge from the same area by




100 times or more,  but its pollutant concentrations are generally less




concentrated than DWF, although in total mass units they are generally




greater if limited to the period of the storm event.





                                  24

-------
                                                       TREATMENT FACILITY
Note:  DWF sources actually overlay tne subcatchments.  They  are
       separated in  the  figure only to simplify the representation.

    Figure 3-1.  SCHEMATIC  SYSTEM DRAWING RAINFALL THROUGH OVERFLOW


-------
 EXCESS FLOW
 TREATMENT-
                  FLOW      INFILTRATION
                  DIVERTER
                                                                       INTERNAL
                                                                       IN-SYSTEM
                                                                       STORAGE-?

                                                                           ^C
-TREATED
 EXCESS FLOW
 DISCHARGE
             Figure 3-2.
TYPICAL STORAGEr-TREATJMENT APPLICATIONS
TO LIMIT UNTREATED OVERFLOWS
                                      26

-------
  Combined Sewer Overflows




  It  is  an  almost universal practice in the United States to treat DWF




  prior  to  its  release to  receiving waters regardless of the method of




  conveyance.   In combined sewer systems this is accomplished by means of




  a regulatory  device, such as a weir, which in theory, diverts all flows




  during non-storm periods.  During storm events, however, the flows




  arriving  at the regulator may be far in excess of the treatment capacity,




  and this  excess is bypassed directly to the receiving water without




  treatment.  This excess  flow constitutes the combined sewage overflow




  and consists  of a mixture of storm runoff, DWF, and such residue as may




 have been picked up in the conveyance system.






 Corrective Action




 The state of  the art seeking solutions to combat pollution resulting




  from storm water runoff  and combined sewage overflows centers on




  (1)  improved maintenance practices and housekeeping, (2) storage




 facilities, and (3)  treatment facilities.






Improved maintenance practices tend to clear  source  material  off  the




streets and out of the conveyance system before the  storm  event occurs,




thereby reducing the contaminants in the storm water flow.  They  also




provide the necessary inspection and maintenance of  regulatory and




Appurtenant devices to insure their proper functioning  (Ref.  2).






Storage facilities are used for contaminant and/or flow rate  reduction




   the  storm influenced flow to permit larger quantities to be
                                    27

-------
 treated at existing DWF facilities or new excess flow treatment facilities.




 They may also be used to provide relief for over-extended systems to




 control or reduce flooding.






 Treatment facilities for excess flows may be either on-line or off-line.




 On-line facilities are exposed to the complete variations of the




 excess flow, both in flow rate and quality, whereas the off-line facilities




 may be fed at a controlled rate, the excess being bypassed or temporarily




 diverted into storage.







 Further descriptions and applications of these storage-treatment schemes




 are discussed later in this volume and in Volume II.






 An introduction to the modeling techniques developed to represent the




 problem phenomena and corrective actions follow.






 THE COMPREHENSIVE MODEL




 The comprehensive Storm Water Management Model uses a high speed digital




 computer to  simulate real  storm events  on the  basis of rainfall (hyeto-




 graph)  inputs  and system (catchment,  conveyance,  storage/treatment,  and




 receiving water)  characterization  to  predict outcomes in the form of




 quantity and quality values.







 The  simulation  technique—that is,  the  representation of the physical




 systems  identifiable within the Model—was  selected because  it  permits




 relatively easy interpretation and  because  it  permits the location of




 remedial devices  (such as a storage tank or  relief  lines)  and/or denotes




 localized problems  (such as flooding) at a great number  of points  in  the




physical system.





                                   28

-------
Since the program objectives are particularly directed toward complete




time and spatial effects, as opposed to simple maxima (such as the




rational formula approach) or only gross  effects (such as total pounds




of pollutant discharged in a given storm), it is considered essential to




work with continuous curves (magnitude versus time),  referred to as




hydrographs and "pollutographs."  The units selected for quality




representation, pounds per minute, identify the mass releases as these




portray both the volume and the concentration of the release in a




single term.  Concentrations are also printed out within the program




for comparisons with measured data.






An overview of the Model structure is shown in Figure 3-3.  The actual




programming structure is discussed in Section 4.  In simplest terms




the program is built up as follows:




     1.  The input sources:




         RUNOFF generates surface runoff based on an arbitrary rainfall




         hyetograph, antecedent conditions, land use, and topography.




         FILTH generates dry weather sanitary flow based on land use,




         population density, and other factors.




         INFIL generates infiltration into the sewer system based on




         available groundwater and sewer condition.



     2.  The central core:




         TRANS carries and combines the inputs through the sewer




         system in accordance with Manning's equations and continuity;




         it assumes complete mixing at various inlet points.




         DECAY routes pollutants through transport and models quality




         changes -due to sedimentation or scour.




                                   29

-------
RUNOFF
(RUNOFF)
                   INFILTRATION
                      (INFIL)
  DECAY
  (QUAD
                    DRY WEATHER
                        FLOW
                       (FILTH)
TRANSPORT
  (TRANS)
INTERNAL
STORAGE
(TSTRDT)
                    EXTERNAL
                    STORAGE
                    (STORAG)
                    TREATMENT
                      (TREAT)
                 RECEIVING  WATER
                     (RECEIV)
      Note:   Subroutine names are shown in parentheses.

           Figure 3-3.  OVERVIEW OF MODEL STRUCTURE
                             30

-------
     3.  The correctional devices:




         TSTRDT, TSTCST, STORAG,  TREAT,  and TRCOST modify hydrographs and




         pollutographs at selected points in the sewer system,




         accounting for retention time,  treatment efficiency, and other




         parameters; associated costs are computed also.




     4.  The receiving waters:




         RECEIV routes hydrographs and pollutographs through the




         receiving waters, which may consist of a stream, stream bed,




         lake, or estuary.







The quality constituents considered for simulation are the 5-day BOD,




total suspended solids, total coliforms (represented as a conservative




pollutant), and DO.  These constituents were selected on the basis of




available supporting data and importance in treatment effectiveness




evaluation.  Notable omissions, such as floatables, nutrients, and




temperature, fell outside the scope of this initial work.  Other




parameters such as COD, volatile suspended solids, settleable solids,




and fecal coliforms can be developed by paralleling the structures of




their modeled counterparts.







MODEL APPLICATIONS




The program is intended for use by municipalities, government agencies,




and consultants as a tool for evaluating the pollution potential of




existing systems, present and future, and for comparing alternate courses




of remedial action.  Although cost-effectiveness techniques are fully




utilized in the Model analysis, the preponderance of human decisions




inherent in this field of work precludes the achievement of an optimal
                                   31

-------
 solution.  For  example,  the  removal  of one pollution unit from a receiv-




 ing water will  have different  values to different people at different




 times.






 Further, the present  limitations in  the state of the art in defining




 the performance and costs of real corrective facilities must be realized




 when interpreting the results.  The  criteria used in the Model are based




 largely on concurrent EPA-sponsored  Demonstration Grant activities and




 comparisons with conventional  sewage (DWF) treatment facilities.  Because




 of these restrictions the development emphasis has been placed on the




 basic structuring of the system phenomena with general credibility,




 rather than on  the exact reproduction of numerical values in the few




 instances where such data are available.







 Demonstration test data comparing modeled with measured results for a




 2,600-acre combined sewered area in Cincinnati are shown in Figures




 3-4 and 3-5 for DWF and combined sewage overflow respectively.  Complete




 demonstration test data are presented in Volume II.







 Programming considerations are discussed in Section 4.






 Users
A knowledge of FORTRAN programming and operating systems interfacing is




essential for the initial setup for comprehensive runs on any new test




area.  Subsequent runs involving only input data changes, such as the




input rainfall hyetographs or area characteristics, may be readily




accomplished by engineers having only a brief familiarization with
                                   32

-------
                                            	^^APPROXIMATE LIMIT
                                           /      |  OF DRAINAGE  BASIN
                                           /
                                                  i
                                    SAMPLING POINT \—\
                 SYSTEM MAP WITH SAMPLING LOCATIONS
                         DRY WEATHER FLOW RESULTS
Sampling
Location
1
2
}
4
S
6
Flow,
Reported*
0.93
0.54
1.45
15.50
0.50
13.94
cfs
Computed
0.90
0.50
2.12
12.58
0.80
13.61
BOD , mg/L
Reported Computed
360. 403.
350.
1,160.
618. 529.
292.
412. 517.
SS, mg/L
Reported Computed
224. 206.
230.
236.
265. 226.
181.
252. 224.
Coli,
MPN/100 ml
Computed
9.5 x. 10


7.0 x 10

7.6 x 10

;


1

7
•Reported values  are averages of approximately 10 grab samples each over a
 two week period.
          Figure  3-4.  BLOODY RUN DRAINAGE BASIN, CINCINNATI
                        DRY  WEATHER FLOW  RESULTS
                                   33

-------
                                                        MEASURED  RUNOFF
                                                              COMPUTED  RUNOFF
                                                                      ia-oo
                                           TIME. HOURS OF DAY
                                                            UCASUREO BOO,
                                                       COWKITED UOO. Ibi/mta
              E o
               o
                                          ICOO      I7>OO       17'JO

                                           TIME, HOURS OF DAY
                                                 MEASURED  SS, mg/l
                                                        COMPUTED SS, mfl/t
                                           TIME, HOURS OF DAY



Figure  3-5.    CINCINNATI  COMBINED SEWER  OVERFLOW RESULTS -  STORM OF


                 APRIL 1,  1970,  SAMPLING POINT  3
                                            34

-------
computer programming, by following the step-by-step instructions  furnished




in the "User's Manual."






The ideal user team would consist of representatives of the city, for




their knowledge of existing facilities and problems and probably  respon-




sibility for implementation; the consultant, for programming and  develop-




ment, expertise; and the regulatory agency, for setting standards  and




basin-wide considerations.






Data Requirements




A brief summary of generalized data requirements to support an application




of the Storm Water Management Model is shown in Table 3-1.  The measured




hydrographs and characteristics referred to in Items 6 and 7 are used




only for correlation-verification analyses.  These measurements may be




discontinued or omitted where satisfactory correlation has been estab-




lished.






The data have been set up so that after the initial run only the storm




(rainfall hyetographs), conditions of occurrence  (clock time and antecedent




history), and conditions of corrective action  (storage/treatment) need  to




be revised.






For a 4,200-acre combined sewer area in the District of Columbia the




total data requirement was described on approximately  500-600 punched




cards, and only 10-20 percent of these required modification to handle




multiple storm events and alterations in  the system.   By  comparison there




are over 10,000 card operations in the complete Model  routine.
                                    35

-------
                 Table  3-1.   GENERAL  DATA  REQUIREMENTS,
                             STORM WATER MANAGEMENT MODEL
 Item 1.  Define  the  Study Area

          Land use,  topography, population distribution,  census  tract
          data,  aerial photos, area boundaries.

 Item 2.  Define  the  System

          Furnish plans of  the collection system to define branching,
          sizes, and slopes.  Types and  general locations of inlet
          structures.

 Item 3.  Define  System Specialties

          Flow diversions,  regulators, storage basins.

 Item 4.  Define  System Maintenance

          Street sweeping (description anbl frequency).  Catchbasin
          cleaning.  Trouble spots (flooding).

 Item 5.  Define  the Receiving Waters

          General description (estuary,  river, or lake).  Measured
          data (flow, tides, topography, water quality).

 Item 6.  Define  the Base Flow (DWF)

          Measured directly or through sewerage facility operating data.
          Hourly variation and weekday vs. weekend.  DWF characteristics
          (composited BOD and SS results).  Industrial flows (locations,
          average quantities, quality).

Item 7.  Define the Storm Flow

          Daily rainfall totals over an extended period (6 months or
          longer) encompassing the study events.  Continuous rainfall
          hyetographs,  continuous runoff hydrographs, and combined flow
          quality measurements (BOD and SS)  for the study events.
          Discrete or composited samples as available (describe fully
          when and how  taken).
                                  36

-------
Programming Costs




Based on experience gained through the demonstration test series, it is




anticipated that costs associated with the use of the Model for compre-




hensive studies will vary from ten thousand to several hundred thousand




dollars per city, depending on the size, complexity, and depth of inves-




tigations.  These costs may appear large unless compared with the




millions and perhaps billions of dollars required to be spent to achieve




proposed levels of water quality improvement.
                                   37

-------
                               SECTION 4

                      PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS
                                                                  Page

PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE                                                41

PROGRAM BLOCKS                                                      42

     Executive Block                                                44

     Runoff Block                                                   44

     Transport Block                                                44

     Storage Block                                                  44

     Receiving Water Block                                          4.5

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS AND COMPATIBILITY                              45

STORAGE AND DATA FILES                                              46

     Program Input                                                  47

     Program Compile and Execution                                  48

     Program Output                                                 49
                                  39

-------
                               SECTION 4




                      PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS







PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE




This version of  the EPA Storm Water Model consists of over 10,000 FORTRAN




statements  in  the  form  of a main program and a large number of subprograms.




FORTRAN was selected as  the programming language because it is possible




to run the  program on machines from various manufacturers without changing




the program.   In order  to meet this objective, certain restrictions were




placed on the  programming to ensure that machine-dependent features did




not appear.  Thus, the  contractors agreed to use only ASA FORTRAN unless




there was assurance that an extension of the language was available on




a reasonable number of machines.  As an example of such an extension,




it was agreed  that in format statements, single quote marks could be




used to delimit  Hollerith information, in addition to the standard nH




format.







it was further agreed that the programming should be carried through in




such a way  that  it would be comprehensible to each of the contractors




and to qualified personnel from EPA or other interested agencies.  Pri-




marily this  objective was met by the thorough documentation submitted




in Volumes  III and IV of this series.  Additionally, certain programming




practices were followed  that were believed to be generally helpful,




although not actually required by the rules of FORTRAN IV.  Some of




these were as  follows:




     1.  Variable names  should in general have mnemonic value.
                                   41

-------
     2.  Variable names used in various subroutines should be uniform




         for the most part throughout the Model.




     3.  Typing of FORTRAN variables should follow the standard default




         rule that those beginning with I, J, K, L, M and N are of type




         INTEGER.




     4.  High execution speed is desirable, but generally should be




         secondary to ease of understanding.




     5.  Numerical data and results in the printout should be suffi-




         ciently labeled so that reference to the FORTRAN program for




         identification is unnecessary.




     6.  Extensive commenting should be provided throughout the FORTRAN




         program.






PROGRAM BLOCKS




At the outset of the project it was expected that, machine storage per-




mitting, the whole program would be run at once, corresponding to every




physical event from a rainstorm falling on a watershed down to computing




details of events in the receiving water.  If machine storage proved




insufficient, the expectation was that overlay techniques could be used-




As the programming effort went forward, however, it became clear that




there were distinct advantages in keeping the major parts of the program




as separate entities, which are hereafter referred to as "blocks."






The adopted arrangement, as shown in Figure 4-1, consisted of a main




control and service block, the Executive Block, and four computational




blocks: (1) Runoff Block, (2) Transport Block,  (3) Storage Block, and




(4)  Receiving Water Block.






                                   42

-------
                                                               DATA
      CONTROL
      AND
      SERVICE
      BLOCK
                                                                         DATA CARD
                                                                         INPUT (TYPICAL)
                                   EXECUTIVE BLOCK
COMPUTATIONAL
BLOCKS
                          REQUIRES
                          NO
                          OUTPUT FILE
RUNOFF
 BLOCK
                            REQUIRES
                            RUNOFF
                            OUTPUT FILE
TRANSPORT
  BLOCK
                   [DATA  \)
                                   -OUTPUT FILE   A
                                   CREATED,
                                   TYPICAL
-o
                                                                                     T
                              REQUIRES
                              TRANSPORT
                              OUTPUT FILE
STORAGE
 BLOCK
                    f  DATA  )
                                         REQUIRE?   "
                                         STORAGE OR
                                         TRANSPORT
                                         OUTPUT FILE
RECEIVING WATER
    BLOCK
                       f DATA  )
                                  /      /\
                                  \   DATA  /
                                      Figure  4-1.   MASTER PROGRAMMING ROUTINE

-------
Executive  Block




The Executive Block assigns  logical units  (disk/tape/drum), determines




the block  or sequence of blocks  to be executed, and, on call, produces




graphs  of  selected results on the line printer.   Thus, this Block  does




no computation as such, while each of the  other four blocks are set up




to carry through a major step in the quantity  and quality  computations.




All access to the computational  blocks and transfers between them  must




pass  through subroutine MAIN of  the Executive  Block.  Transfers are ac-




complished on off-line devices (disk/tape/drum) which may  be saved for




multiple trials or permanent record.






Runoff  Block




The Runoff Block computes the storm water  runoff  and its characteristics




for a given storm for each subcatchment and stores the results in  the




form  of hydrographs and pollutographs at inlets to the main sewer  system.






Transport  Block




The Transport Block sets up pre-storm conditions  by computing DWF  and




infiltration and distributing them throughout  the conveyance system.




The Block  then performs its primary function of flow and quality




routing, picking up the runoff results, and producing combined flow




hydrographs and pollutographs  for the total drainage basin and at  sel-




ected intermediate points.






Storage Block




The Storage Block uses the output of the Transport Block and modifies




the flow and characteristics at a given point or points according  to
                                   44

-------
the predefined storage and treatment facilities provided.   Costs asso-




ciated with the construction and operation of the storage/treatment




facilities are computed.






Receiving Water Block



The Receiving Water Block accepts the output of the Transport Block




directly, or the modified output of the Storage Block, and computes



the dispersion and effects of the discharge in the receiving river, lake,




or bay.






In principle, the capability exists to run all blocks together in a




given computer execution, although from a practical and sometimes




necessary (due to computer core limitations) viewpoint, typical runs




involve one or two computational blocks together with the Executive




Block.  Using this approach avoids overlay and, moreover, allows for




examination of intermediate results before continuing the computations.




Further, it permits the use of intermediate results as start-up data  in




subsequent execution runs, thereby avoiding the waste of repeating the




computations already performed.






MACHINE REQUIREMENTS AND COMPATIBILITY



All parts of the program have been run on at least two machines.   During




development of the program MSB used an IBM 360/67 at the Stanford




University Computation Center; WRE used a UNIVAC 1108 located in Oakland




and accessed by their terminal in Walnut Creek; and UP initially used an




IBM 360/50 until it was replaced at the University of Florida Computation




Center by an IBM 360/65.
                                   45

-------
 In addition  to  using  these  various machines with  their  standard compilers,




 M&E tested all  parts  of  the program using  the FORTRAN compiler developed




 by the University of  Waterloo  (WATFOR).  This compiler  uncovered a number




 of "bugs" that  the IBM FORTRAN IV compilers were willing to tolerate.




 Corrections  were made accordingly to avoid possible difficulties if the




 program were to run in the  future on a different type of machine.  The




 most common  bug uncovered by WATFOR was failure to set  initial values




 for all variables.







 STORAGE AND DATA FILES




 As it stands, the program can be run on a machine having core storage




 capacity of  at least 350K bytes (or equivalent).  In addition, the program




 uses peripheral storage devices which may consist of disk, tape, or drum




 units, depending on the machine configuration.  The UNIVAC 1108 used




by WRE typically has tape and drum,  while the IBM 360 systems used by




M&E,  UF,  and EPA have disk capabilities that make it possible to avoid




 tape  usage.   One IBM 2314 Disk Storage Device can provide ample room




 for all files created by the program,  or alternatively,  the files can




 be placed on several  devices, depending on the system configuration.




 The disk units are used both for transfer of information between blocks,




 in which case data files are created, and for scratch files used only




 temporarily  in execution of a given block.






A sample of  core capacities used by separate program blocks on repre-




 sentative demonstration runs is shown in Table 4-1.
                                  46

-------
              Table 4-1. REPRESENTATIVE VALUES OF CORE
                         CAPACITIES REQUIRED IN DEMONSTRATION RUNS


                                      Machine Core Storage Required,
    	Program Block (s)	bytes	

    Executive*                                   225K

    Executive and Runoff*                        264K

    Executive and Transport*
      Without internal storage                   310K
      With internal storage                      334K

    Storage and Treatment                        183K

    Executive and Receiving Water*               327K

    *0f the storage required, 170K bytes are required in the common
     blocks.
The data files correspond to a given storm on a given site, and in many

cases they can be used repeatedly to test alternatives without going

through the entire computation each time.  Although the original inten-

tion was to use formatting on these files, it has proven preferable to

use unformatted input/output which greatly speeds up read/write operations.


Program Input

In addition to the files described above, the various blocks of the

program use data card input as described in the  "User's Manual,"  Vol-

ume III of this series.  Thus, the user must prepare the data cards

needed for a given block and also supply JCL cards corresponding to the

appropriate file devices.
                                   47

-------
 It is also possible with some systems  to hold the data card images on a




 file.   If, in addition, the FORTRAN  (or its object module) is held on a




 file, the program can be run with no card input.  This method has been




 used in conjunction with terminal access on the IBM 360/67 at Stanford




 University.  With so large a program the elimination of card reading is




 very convenient.






 Program Compile and Execution




 A sample of the compile and execution times used by separate program




 blocks  on representative demonstration runs, IBM 360/67, is shown in




 Table 4-2.  This table further illustrates the savings which were made




 by storing compiled blocks of the program in a permanent job library




 (Load Modules).









 No general attempt was made for overall optimization of the program with




 regard  to storage or timing.  It is very likely that significant improve-




 ments can be made, although the present requirements are not considered




 excessive in view of the amount of information generated.  Some initial




 versions of the Model were restructured to improve timing by eliminating




 the need for SORT and MERGE operations on peripheral devices.  Also, the




 input and output operations onto data files are unformatted to speed up




 the read/write  operations.   Again, it was agreed to avoid the adjust-




able dimensioning feature of FORTRAN IV since it is known to be time-




consuming.
                                  48

-------
                Table 4-2. SAMPLE COMPILE AND EXECUTION
                           TIMES ON DEMONSTRATION RUNS
Program Block (s)
Executive
Executive and Runoff
Machine
Uncpmpiled*
Execution
CPU*** Time****
1.39 2.22
time, min
Load Module**
Execution
CPU*** Time****
0.18 0.28
1.15 1.97
Executive and Transport
(without internal storage)   2.77

Executive and Transport
(with internal storage)       3.06

Storage and Treatment        0.36

Receiving Water              2.60
4.38


4.71

0.52

3.57
0.72
0.85
1.16
1.30
   *Time includes compile/ link-edit, and execute.
  **Time required for link-edit and execute only.
 ***Actual computational time in computer core not including the time
    needed to execute the read and write (I/O) statements or to run the
    peripheral devices.
****Time required in the computer including I/O statements.
 Program Output

 Output from the program consists of the usual line printer tabulations,

 which, if desired,  can be supplemented by selected plotted hydrographs

 and pollutographs also produced on the line printer at execution time.

 These plots are available through subroutine GRAPH of the Executive Block,

 using the output files of any of the computational blocks.


 There has been discussion from time to time of incorporating improved

 offline plotter capability in the program,  but it was unfeasible to do
                                   49

-------
so within the scope of the current project.  In any event, such plotting




would use output files of the kind now generated, and could be added as




a set of subroutines to be called by the Executive Block.
                                  50

-------
              PART 2




QUANTITY (HYDRQLOGIC) SUBROUTINES

-------
                               SECTION 5




                     SURFACE RUNOFF QUANTITY MODEL
OBJECTIVES                                                          53




RELATION TO STORM WATER PROGRAM                                     54




THE MODEL SUBROUTINES                                               54




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                             56




     Model Geometry                                                 56




     Solution Procedure                                             57




TEST APPLICATIONS                                                   63




     Chicago 10-Acre Tract                                          63




     Oakdale (Chicago)                                              67




     Northwood  (Baltimore)                                          67




     Additional Testing                                             71




CONCLUSION                                                          75
                                    51

-------
                               SECTION 5




                      SURFACE RUNOFF QUANTITY MODEL






OBJECTIVES




The Surface Runoff Quantity model (subroutine RUNOFF) simulates the




runoff phenomena of a drainage basin for any given rainfall pattern.




The objective of the model is to provide a basis for subsequent compu-




tation of pollutographs, a time-history of runoff quality, that are




necessary for planning, design, and operation of the Storm Water Manage-




ment Model.






The EPA has contemplated the use of the Model throughout the United




States.  Probably the only information that can reasonably be expected




to be available in any locality is climatological data and the physical




watershed characteristics, such as size, ground slope, and types of




ground cover.






To meet this specific objective, RUNOFF represents the drainage basin by




an aggregate of idealized subcatchments and gutters  that are common de-




nominators of the drainage plan and are readily quantifiable.  Flexi-




bility of the program to be adopted to any prototype conditions was of




great concern and was considered in the model formulation and develop-




ment.






The model accepts the input of any rainfall hyetograph, a time-history of




rainfall intensity, as given.  The rainfall hyetograph for a location is




more readily available from the Weather Bureau and is subjected to less
                                   53

-------
influence by engineering works.  Its prediction by stochastic process is




not part of the Surface Runoff Quantity model.






RELATION TO STORM WATER PROGRAM




RUNOFF is the first computational subroutine of the Storm Water Management




Model.  It calculates the hydrographs by a step-by-step accounting of




rainfall, infiltration, detention/ overland flow, and gutter flow.  In so




doing, it provides information about the overland flow and gutter flow at




various parts of the drainage system for use by the Surface Runoff Quality




model.  It also generates hydrographs for the designated entry points to




the major sewer line.  These hydrographs are then accepted by the Transport




Model which routes the quantity and quality of wastewater throughout the




sewerage system, to the treatment plant, and to the receiving water body.






The most important function of RUNOFF is therefore to furnish hydraulic




information at the right time and right place to serve the need of other




models.  While the Model can get started by itself, its answers must be




quite accurate and compatible with those of other models.






THE MODEL SUBROUTINES




The computer program developed to perform the Surface Runoff Quantity




model computation consists of six subroutines, i.e., RUNOFF, HYDRO,




RHYDRO, WSHED, GUTTER, and HCURVE.  Detailed documentations of each sub-




routine are provided in the "User's Manual,"   Only a brief description




of their functional relationships is discussed herein.






Subroutine RUNOFF provides the necessary liaison with the master program




of the overall Storm Water Management Model.  RUNOFF, in turn, calls
                                   54

-------
HYDRO to coordinate the computation of the hydrograph with the assistance




of three core subroutines, RHYDRO, WSHED,  and GUTTER.






Subroutine RHYDRO is called by HYDRO to read all input data related to




the drainage basin and to perform initial preparatory work such as unit




conversion and error detection.  Default options are available for the




typical values of physical coefficients describing the roughness factor,




detention requirement, and infiltration characteristics.  A normal exe-




cution of RHYDRO provides all the necessary information for the calcu-




lation of a runoff hydrograph.






Subroutine WSHED computes the depth and flow rate of water overland.  It




interpolates the rainfall hyetograph to obtain the rainfall intensity for




the period of computation and accounts for infiltration and surface




storage.  Upon completion, it returns with a set of water depth and flow




for the subcatchments.






The function of subroutine GUTTER is similar to that of WSHED.  It cal-




culates a complete set of water depth and flow for the gutters and pipes




in the system.  It accounts for surcharge in full conduits, assuming




temporary storage at  the upstream junction until surcharge is no  longer




necessary.






The hydrograph solutions are printed in tabulated form.  In addition,




HCUKVE will prepare X-Y coordinates of the hydrograph at selected points




of the drainage system for printer plot routines which plot the curves




directly in the computer output.
                                    55

-------
 There is a call to subroutine GRAPH (0)  from subroutine  RUNOFF.   GRAPH  is




 described in Section 4.   The Surface Runoff Quality model,  subroutine




 SFQUAL in RUNOFF,  is described in Section 11.






 THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT




 Existing methods of runoff estimate were evaluated as  background and for




 potential use in the contemplated model.  Methods  evaluated include  the




 rational method- "rational-rational" method (Ref.  1);  British Road Re-




 search Laboratory  Method (Ref.  2); dimensionless hydrograph method of




 Izzard (Refs. 3,4);  Chicago Method (Ref. 5);  and the Stanford Watershed




 Model (Ref.  6).






 Empiricism at various  degrees was  found  in all  the methods  that  used




 factors  not easily determined by  any ready rule. However, previous studies




 have  advanced much of  the theoretical  ground  work  related to the funda-




 mental process of  runoff phenomena,  i.e.,  rainfall,  infiltration,  deten-




 tion,  overland flow, and gutter flow.  For the  development  of a  compre-




 hensive  surface  runoff quantity model, each of  these processes must  be




 simulated individually and operated  simultaneously by  a  computer program.






 Model  Geometry




 Model  geometry is  a discretization procedure  for the mathematical abstrac-




 tion of the physical drainage system.  For the  computation  of the  hydro-




 graph, the drainage basin  may be conceptually represented by a network  of




hydraulic elements, i.e.,  subcatchments, gutters,  and pipes.   Hydraulic




properties of  each element are then  characterized by various  parameters,




such as size,  slope, and roughness coefficient.
                                    56

-------
As was originally envisioned,  a subcatchment is rectangular in shape with




reasonably uniform watershed characteristics,  such as surface cover and




ground slope.  The geometry of a subcatchment is defined by the area,




width, and ground slope.  The type of ground cover determines the deten-




tion depth requirements, the roughness factor (such as Manning's coeffi-




cient) , and the coefficients describing the infiltration loss by Horton's




exponential function (Ref. 5).






The subcatchments need not be the same size and the irregular shape can




be approximated by an equivalent rectangle by computing the mean width.




In principle, a series of subcatchments can be designed to cover the




entire drainage basin.






The subcatchments form an aggregated system by gutters and pipes speci-




fying the connectivity of flow.  Hydraulically, gutters and pipes are




described by the Manning's coefficient, length, invert slope, and geo-




metric description of the shape.  The latter may include the bottom width




and side slopes for rectangles, trapezoids, and triangles and the diameter




for circular pipes.






Figure 5-1 presents a typical but idealized drainage system.  As shown,




subcatchment 2 drains into gutter 1.  Both gutter 1 and subcatchment 1




discharge into gutter 2.  Several subcatchments and gutters can be con-




nected to a given gutter, depending on the topographic condition.






Solution Procedure




Once the properties of each hydraulic element are given, the computer




can be instructed to make a step-by-step accounting of how much water






                                  57

-------
                                       INPUT
                         TIME
            GUTTER-?
•SUBCATCHMENT
                                   SYSTEM

MLET
        ggg^        3
     _

     U_

     O
     tr
        '!
       , ,
       !i
      jM
                        TIME
                                     OUTPUT
           Figure 5-1.  DEFINITION OF A DRAINAGE SYSTEM
                       58

-------
comes in, how much is lost to infiltration, and what will be the outflow




and the remaining water depth in each increment of time.  This accounting




procedure can best be described by the flow chart shown in Figure 5-2.




First, the computer reads and edits data pertaining to the rainfall




hyetograph, subcatchment, and gutter characteristics and their inter-




connections.  Unit conversion is made for all parameters to conform in




the pound-foot-second system.






Stepwise computation proceeds as follows (Figure 5-2):






      1.  Rainfall is added to the subcatchment according to the specified




         hyetograph,






                            D  = D  + R At                            (D






         where  D   =  Water depth after rainfall




                Dfc  =  Water depth of the  subcatchment at  time, t




                Rfc  =  Intensity of  rainfall  in  time interval, At






      2.  Infiltration is  computed by Horton's exponential  function and is




         subtracted from  water  depth existing on the subcatchment,
                            fo
         and
                            D2 = Di ~ ItAt                            (3)
         where   fQ,   f^,   and a   are  coefficients  in Horton's equation




         D2  is  inte*roediate  water  depth after  accounting  for  infiltration.
                                    59

-------
                    f
                 READ
                    IEDIT DATA
                     CONSTRUCT
                    CONNECTIVITY
                       MATRIX
T
I
M

E


P;
E
R

I
0

D
               OVERLAND FLOW
               I. RAINFALL
               2. INFILTRATION
               3. DETENTION
               4 FLOW (MANNING'S)
               5. DEPTH (CONTINUITY)
        SUBCATCHMENTS
TRAPEZOIDN
HYDRAULIC
RADIUS
 GUTTER FLOW
I. OVERLAND INPUT
2. GUTTER INPUT
3. FLOW (MANNING'S)
4. DEPTH (CONTINUITY)
PIPE
HYDRAULIC
RADIUS
                      COMPUTE
                    HYDROGRAPH
                    COORDINATE
                                GUTTERS/ PIPES
                        PLOT
                    HYDROGRAPH
                      ( STOP \
      Figure 5-2.  PLOW CHART, HYDROGRAPHIC COMPUTATION
                        60

-------
3.  If the resulting water depth of the subcatchment,  D ,  is larger



    than the specified detention requirement,  D,,  an outflow rate is



    computed using Manning's equation,




               v . ±i«  (D    D )  2/3  sl/2                      (4)

                     n     2    d




    and
                     Qw = V W (D2 - Dd)                          <5)




    where  V   =  Velocity



           n   =  Manning's coefficient



           s   =  Ground slope



           W   =  Width



           Q   =  Outflow rate





4.  The continuity equation is solved to determine the water depth of



    the subcatchments, resulting from the rainfall, infiltration,  and



    outflow,


                   Dt+At = D2 " (VA)At

                                                                 (6)




    where  A  is the surface area of the subcatchment.




5.  Steps 1 to 4 are repeated until computations  for  all  subcatchments



    are completed.




6.  The inflow  (Q. ) to  a gutter is computed  as a summation of outflow



    from tributary subcatchments  (Q   .) and flow  rate of  immediate



    upstream gutters  (Q   .).





                    Q.  = £0  . + ZQ  .                           (7)
                    xin    *w,i     g,i




                               61

-------
  7.   The inflow is added to raise the existing water depth of the



      gutter according to its geometry,





                   Y  = Y  +  (Q.  / A )  At                        (8)
                    1    t    *in    s




      where  Y   and  Y   =  Water depth of the gutter



             A            =  Mean water  surface area between Y,  and Y.
              s                                                It




  8.   The outflow is calculated  for the  gutter using Manning's equation,




                                   ,  1/2                         /QI
                          n         i



     and
                          Q  = V A                               (10)
                           g      c




     where  R   =  Hydraulic  radius



            S^  =  Invert  slope



            A   =  Cross-sectional area at Y,
                                            1




 9.  The continuity equation  is solved to determine the water depth



     of the gutter, resulting from the inflow and outflow.





                     = Y.  + (Q.   - 0 )  At / A                    (ID
10.  Steps 6 to 9 are repeated until all the gutters are finished.





11.  The flows, reaching the point of concern, are added to produce a



     hydrograph coordinate along the time axis.
                               62

-------
    12.  The processes from Steps 1 to 11 are repeated for succeeding




         time periods until the complete hydrograph is computed.






The step-by-step description of the solution procedure gives a physical




picture of the processes being modeled.  The integration of variables in




each time increment was originally performed by the modified Euler's two-




step method.  This is now accomplished by the Newton-Raphson method




(Ref. 7), which produces a smoother hydrograph and more stable solution.






As was noted, Manning's equation was used for computation during each




time interval of integration.  The "state" of the system, however, is




being updated continuously.  Thus, the dynamic behavior of the runoff




phenomena was simulated by a stepwise and successive quasi-steady state




approximation.






TEST APPLICATIONS
Chicago 10-Acre Tract




The Surface Runoff Quantity  model as developed was utilized to calculate




a hydrograph for a typical 10-acre tract in Chicago.  Land use, geometry,




and direction of flow of the drainage basin are shown in Figure 5-3,




taken directly from the American Society of Civil Engineers  (ASCE) Manual




No. 37  (Ref. 8).  As shown,  the area is 54 percent pervious.  For  the pur-




pose of simulation, the land was represented by 80 subcatchroents,  40




gutters, and 4 pipes.  Size of the subcatchments ranges from 0.04  to 0.48




acre.  Necessary information concerning the size, width, slope, retention




depth, and rate of infiltration was obtained from the manual.
                                   63

-------
                        	j	_  ;	^	p « , __
                      «   	si..*!™'     	;  i,
    'WM'-.'"11" "VlVVr,'ir,Tp'Y1'T! ' - """ri*    i "^ 'V'VVr' .". * ",•"V"V-9"V v r
           1                  I                   I        II11          ' I    I ' '
                                           —  — UM'



                                         ranageafea an<5 directtwi of flcm
Sources  American Society of Civil  Engineers,  Manual of Engineering Practice No   37

          1960 (Ref.  8}.                                                                    '
                 Figure 5-3.   TYPICAL  CHICAGO  10-ACRE  TRACT DRAINAGE  BASIN

-------
A 181-minute design storm was applied to the drainage basin.   The rainfall




hyetograph and the calculated runoff hydrograph were plotted in Figure 5-4.




For the purpose of comparison, the calculated hydrograph by the Chicago




Method is also shown in the figure.  Results indicate that these hydro-




graphs have a comparable rising limb.  Both of them peak at about the same




time, i.e., 75 minutes from the start of rainfall.  However, the Chicago




Method calculates a lower peak value  (18 cfs against 22 cfs) and also a




lower recession.






Since both curves are for the hypothetical case, the question of accuracy




is not an issue.  However, the Chicago Method is seen to produce a smaller




total runoff.  This can only be accounted for by a  larger infiltration




loss which might seem anomalous, because both methods use the same




Horton's equation for calculating  infiltration  loss.  The explanation is




that the Chicago Method computed the mass curve for infiltration loss.




Thus, the method tends to satisfy  the infiltration  rate at  any  given time




even though  there is not sufficient rainfall at that moment.   The present




method allows  for the infiltration rate as  calculated only  when there is




sufficient water on the ground at  that  given instant.






The  infiltration, loss of the present method was 28  percent of the total




rainfall.  The mass continuity has been maintained  within 0.1 percent of




the  rainfall.  No such information was  available  on the Chicago Method




for  comparison.
                                     65

-------
                           DESIGN STORM
   0.0    40.0    80.0   120.0   160.0  200.0
              TIME (MIN)
25.0 T
                              DESIGN
                           HYDROGRAPHS
                          STORM WATER MANAGEMENT
                          MODEL
                           CHICAGO METHOD
  .0
   0.0   40.0   80.0   120.0   160.0   200.0
             TIME (MIN)
      Figure 5-4.  RAINFALL HYETOGRAPH AND CALCULATED

                RUNOFF HYDROGRAPHS, CHICAGO 10-ACRE TRACT
                       66

-------
Oakdale (Chicago)




Some rainfall and runoff data have been gathered at Oakdale (Chicago)  for




a drainage basin of 12.9 acres (Ref. 9).  The land use is similar to the




typical 10-acre tract described previously in Figure 5-3.






A detailed description of this particular drainage basin is not available.




It was suggested that the Oakdale rainfall hyetograph could be applied on




the typical 10-acre tract.  The resulting runoff hydrograph could be




multiplied by 1.29 to account for the difference in areas.  This cal-




culated runoff hydrograph could then be compared to the measured Oakdale




hydrograph.






The calculated and measured runoff hydrographs are compared in Figure 5-5.




The measured peak was found to be 2 to  3 cfs higher than  the calculated




one.  The timing for the first and the  second peaks was  also noted  to be




offset by 5 and 10 minutes respectively.  The overall comparison, however,




is reasonably close.






Northwood  (Baltimore)




The Johns Hopkins University has  conducted  an intensive  data gathering




program for rainfall-runoff relationships at Northwood  (Baltimore).  The




data for the verification of the  model  were taken  from an ASCE Urban




Water Resources Research Program publication (Ref. 10).






Briefly, the drainage basin area  is 47.4 acres with approximately 60




percent as residential  area and 40 percent  as a  shopping center,  including




a large parking  lot.  Average ground slope  is 3  percent  and the
                                    67

-------

25 L
_  201
u_

k-   15 i
U_   I0

10-
                                              OAKDALE (CHICAGO)
                                              STORM OF JULY 2,1960
                                              AREA = 12.9 ACRES
       CALCULATED (USING
       CHICAGO 10-ACRE  TRACT,
       SCALED UP BY 1.29)
140    150    160
     TIME (WIN)
                                         170
                                                   180
190
200
          Figure 5-5. CALCULATED AND OBSERVED RUNOFF HYDROGRAPHS,
                   OAKDALE (CHICAGO)

-------
imperviousness is 68 percent.  Other pertinent information concerning




the drainage basin is given in the publication.






It was found that detailed information for the subdivision of the drainage




basin was not available in the Northwood area as it was in the Chicago




case.  Moreover, the effort required for such a data acquisition program




was considered too prohibitive.  The feasibility of utilizing a coarser




subdivision of the drainage basin was therefore investigated.






The Johns Hopkins University subdivided the Northwood drainage basin into




32 subcatchments  (Ref. 10).  These subcatchments were combined into 12




basic subcatchments in this simulation study, as shown in Figure 5-6.




In summary, the 47.4-acre  drainage basin was represented by  12 composite




subcatchments and 13 pipes in  the simulation.  The areas of  the  composite




subcatchments range from  2 to  9 acres.  These, as compared to the Chicago




case of 80  subcatchments  and 44 gutters  (pipes) for a 10-acre tract, are




very coarse.






Because of  the  aggregation of  subcatchments,  each composite  subcatchment




was not representing any  unique properties of ground  cover as  in the




Chicago case.   Some  scheme had to be devised to compute  the  average




physical properties, such as  detention  depth, infiltration rate, and




Manning's coefficient,  for the composite  subcatchment.   In this study,  all




the physical  parameters,  except Manning's coefficient, were  calculated




by a weighted average based on the  percent perviousness  of the area.  For




example,  the  detention  depth is  1/16-inch for an  impervious  area and 1/4-




inch  for  a  pervious  area  (Ref. 5).   The detention of a composite
                                    69

-------
   Rain Gage #2
       b
	DRAINAGE AREA
  3
      SUBCATCHMENT BOUNDARY
SUBCATCHMENT NUMBER
    Source:  L. S.  Tucker,  "Northwood Gaging Installation,
             Baltimore-Instrumentation and Data"  (Ref. 10).
           Figure 5-6.   NORTHWOOD  (BALTIMORE)  DRAINAGE BASIN PLAN
                                     70

-------
subcatchment with  x  fraction impervious was calculated by:




                                         x   (l~x)
                    Average detention = — + —r—                  (12)





In the case of Manning's coefficient  n , a harmonic mean was taken





                           1 =   x    (1-x)                         (13)

                           n   0.014   0.35




where 0.014 and 0.35 are the Manning's coefficients for impervious and



pervious areas respectively (Ref. 6).





The results of a simulation for the Northwood storm of August 1, 1965,



are shown in Figure 5-7.  For the purpose of comparison, the measured



runoff is also plotted in the same figure.  Again, the simulation is quite



good, with accurate prediction of the peaks.  The problem of slow reces-



sion is seen in the figure and is perhaps due to high values of Manning's



coefficient being used for pervious areas.





It must be pointed out that all the necessary coefficients used in the



simulation were estimated from Chicago data.  The largest pipe diameter



of the system is 4 feet.





Additional Testing



While the discretization of the drainage basin  into  finer subcatchments



is theoretically more correct, the  coarsening of the system  is desirable



from the practical standpoint.  However, thare  are problems  associated



with the gross approximation of the system by large  subcatchments.





In the case of the Selby Street drainage basin  in San Francisco,  the



average detention depth requirement for  a  gross subcatchment was  found





                                    71

-------
     80.0 T
                                                      NORTHWOOD (BALTIMORE)
                                                      STORM OF AUG. I, 1965
                                                      AREA = 47.4 ACRES

CO
C
2
Z>
o:
     6O.O--
40.0 • •
     20.0-•
      0.0
         0.0
                                             OBSERVED
                                             STORM WATER MANAGEMENT
                                             MODEL
           I	I	I	1 	1	>	>""v	1	1	H
          10.0  20.0  30.0  40.0  50.0  60.0  70.0  80.0 SO.O  100.0
                           TIME (WIN)
                  Figure 5-7.  CALCULATED AND OBSERVED RUNOFF HYDROGRAPHS,
                            NORTHWOOD (BALTIMORE)

-------
to store the early low intensity rainfall.   The rising limb of the hydro-




graph is therefore retarded greatly.






This problem was resolved by splitting each subcatchment into a pervious




area and an impervious area according to the percent imperviousness of




the ground cover.  Since the impervious area requires small detention




depth, it produces early runoff for the hydrograph.  The use of "equiva-




lent" detention depths and friction coefficients is avoided entirely.






The capability to split the area was incorporated into the computer pro-




gram and tested with the data of Northwood (Baltimore).  Figure 5-8




presents the result of the simulation for the 12-subcatchment system.  The




curve is noted to fit the observed data slightly better than the one




shown in Figure 5-7.  The reason it did not make more difference was that




the early part of the rainfall intensity in this case was relatively




high.  This fact tends to reduce the importance of the detention depth.






Further analysis led to splitting each subcatchment into three parts:




          1.  Pervious




          2.  Impervious, with surface detention




          3.  Impervious, without surface detention.




This causes "instant" runoff from part of the system  and is more in




keeping with observed results.  Use of this final version is described in




the verification tests on Baker Street, San Francisco, in Volume II of




this report.
                                   73

-------
-
                    60
                    50
                    40
                  .-
                  u.
                  (J
                  u.
                  :
                    30
                    20
                    10
                     NORTHWOOD (BALTIMORE)

                     STORM OF AUGUST I, 1965 AM

                         AREA • 47.4 ACRES
                             12- SUBCATCHMENT  SYSTEM
                    \  5- SUBCATCHMENT  SYSTEM
                                            t
                                   \ '"V    /'
y
                                                                       OBSERVED
                              10     20     30     40     50     60     70     80     SO

                                                TIME  (M!N)
                             Figure 5-8.  EFFECT OF  COARSENING SUBCATCHMENT SYSTEM,

                                         NORTHWOOD  (BALTIMORE)

-------
Further coarsening of the subcatchment system was tested with the  North-




wood data.  The 12-subcatchment system shown in Figure 5-6 was combined




into a 5-subcatchment system.  The result of the simulation is presented




in Figure 5-8.  As expected, the coarsening of the system reduces  the




accuracy of prediction.  More experience with the model will be needed




to ascertain the level of detail necessary for the accuracy desired in




any specific application.






CONCLUSION




The method described is only a near theoretical approximation of physical




phenomena occurring in the prototype.  The propagation of waves and the




problem of varied flow overland and in the gutters are not treated rigor-




ously in  the method.  However, the quasi-steady state approximation by




Manning's equation is believed adequate for practical purposes in view




of the fact that prototype  conditions are not  amenable to  a  theoretically




more thorough  analysis.






Aside from theoretical soundness, the validity of  the method can  best be




demonstrated by its ability to reproduce  the  field data.   Simulation




results indicate that  the verification is reasonably  good.   Moreover,  all




the parameters and coefficients utilized  in  the simulation were taken




directly  from  published  literature.  No optimization procedure was used  to




adjust the coefficients  for a better  fit  between  the  calculated and  ob-




served hydrograph.






The use of a discretized system to represent a drainage  area increases




the flexibility and  latitude for  the  model  to be  adopted to  other
                                   75

-------
prototype conditions.  The capability of the Surface Runoff Model to




treat the pipe problem also enables more subcatchments to be aggregated




into a larger tributary area.  Subcatchments interconnected by pipes that




lead to a common confluent point can be combined into an inlet drainage




basin.  The aggregation of subcatchments, however, should only be made




to the extent where the inherent assumptions still hold.  For example,




the pipe routine uses the invert slope to calculate flow; therefore, the




Surface Runoff Model should not be expanded to cover the larger size




pipes where the backwater effect becomes important. It is believed that




the Surface Runoff Model would be applicable for lateral sewers with pipe




diameters up to 30 inches in most cases.  Beyond that, the problem




should be handled by the Transport Model which is described in Section 8




of this report.
                                   76

-------
                              SECTION 6




                   DRY WEATHER FLOW QUANTITY MODEL





                                                                  Page




OBJECTIVES                                                         80




THE MODEL SUBROUTINE                                               80




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                            81




     Input Data                                                    31




     Methodology                                                   34




TEST APPLICATIONS                                                  37




CONCLUSION                                                         94
                                   77

-------
                               SECTION 6




                   DRY WEATHER FLOW QUANTITY MODEL






In the context of the Storm Water Management Model,  the quantity and




quality of dry weather flow are important as they occur both prior to and




during periods of storm runoff in combined sewers.  At the onset of storm




runoff, the initial volume in the sewer and the amount of settled and




flowing pollutants establish initial conditions for flow and pollutant




routing.  This factor is especially important in assessing initial




flushing of sewers by runoff.  During runoff, DWF, although having lost




its hydraulic significance, is important because of its relatively large




pollutant concentration.  Consequently, DWF serves as a significant




weighting factor in mass balance relationships affecting pollutant




concentrations.






In this study, separate modeling was undertaken for wastewater flow,




wastewater quality, and groundwater infiltration.  DWF quality, although




estimated concurrently with quantity in the subroutine FILTH, is  thus




discussed separately  in Section 12 of this volume.  In addition,  DWF




quantity, as estimated in subroutine FILTH and defined in  the following




discussion, consists  of only wastewater flow and  excludes  any estimate




of infiltration.  Although DWF in sewers  actually consists  of dry weather




infiltration mixed with domestic, commercial, and industrial sewage,




infiltration is modeled separately by subroutine  INFIL and,  as  a  result,




is discussed separately in Section  7  of this volume.  The  following dis-




cussion therefore describes  the development and  testing  of subroutine
                                   79

-------
FILTH as a predictive model for average wastewater flows from residential,




commercial, and industrial urban areas.






OBJECTIVES




Objectives in the development of subroutine FILTH were to predict accurate-




ly average wastewater flows and total pollutant loads.  DWF's significance




to the Storm Water Management Model was originally thought to be in




establishing initial conditions for flow routing.  However, comparisons




of outfall hydrographs routed both with and without initialized DWF




showed identical results after the first few minutes of overflow.  Sub-




sequent development has shown that DWF's primary significance lies in




establishing initial quality conditions.  Initial sediment load on sewer




inverts and initial flow concentrations represent a relatively high per-




centage of initial pollutant overflow.  Subsequent analyses showed also




that hourly variation in average flow was required to describe DWF quality




adequately.






THE MODEL SUBROUTINE




 The computer program developed to perform the DWF quantity computation




 is subroutine FILTH.  This subroutine also computes the DWF quality.




 Subroutine FILTH is called from subroutine TRANS.






 Daily and hourly flow variation for the study area are input along with




 flow quantities from process flows, if they are known.  Information




 regarding total population, population density, land use, residential




 income, and home valuation, among other factors, are also required.




 The DWF quantity is then computed and passed back to subroutine TRANS.
                                   30

-------
THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT




Input Data




A key consideration in model development was the availability of input




data for estimating purposes.  To minimize this constraint, FILTH was  pro-




grammed to accept readily census tract and block statistical data.  These




data serve as the most complete and accessible information on population




and housing in large urban areas.  Other acceptable inputs are sewage




flow and metered water use data gathered for the drainage basin being




modeled.






Using a variety of flow and drainage basin data, the model has been




designed to estimate wastewater inputs at discrete locations along the




trunk sewer of the drainage basin being modeled.  These estimates are




calculated from data describing drainage basin subsections  (subcatchments)




through which the trunk sewer passes.  As shown in Figure 6-1, an input




manhole near the center of each subcatchment is assumed to accept all




sewage flow from that subcatchment.  Sewage inputs from all subcatchments




are then added to infiltration estimates from all pipe sections, and in




the case of combined sewers, to runoff estimates from all inlet subcatch-




ments.  Noting the locations and timing of all inputs, the  Transport




 Model (subroutine TRANS)  then produces hydrographs at any specified




 location along the sewer.






Possible sources of DWF, other than for household wastewater, are listed




in Table 6-1 (Ref. 1).  Because of its highly unpredictable nature, dis-




charge from swimming pools has been excluded as a source of DWF both
                                   81

-------
                                         — K\  ^ MANHOLE
                                                  SEWER ELEMENT  NUMBERS
                                                   SUBCATCHMENT OR SUBAREA
                                                   NUMBER
                                                   INPUT MANHOLES
                                                  CONDUITS
                                                  SUBAREA BOUNDARIES
                                                  SUBCATCHMENT  BOUNDARIES
Sewer and Subcatchnent Data
     1.  Manhole 32 is the most downstream point.
     2.  Subcatchments 1,2,3, and 4 are single-family residential
        areas, each 100 acres in size and each with water retering.
     3.  Subcatchments 5 and 7 are 220-acre industrial areas.
     4.  Subarea 6 is a 250-acre park.
     5.  Subarea 3 is a 50-acre commercial area.

        Subareas 6 and 8 constitute a subcatchment draining to
        input manhole number 21.

Resulting Data
     8 sewage estimates
     KTNUM, total Subcatchments and subareas  in drainage basin =  8.
     TOTA, total acres in drainage basin = 1,140.
KNUM,
subcatchment
or subarea
1
,

1
'
1
-
;!
INPUT,
KLAND,
input manhole land use
number
3
! 1

•
2<
:•:
24
2]
category
1
.
.
1
:
5
-!
1
ASUB,
acres in
subcatchment
or subarea
100
100
100
100
220
250
220
50
      Figure  6-1.  DETERMINATION OF SUBCATCHMENT  AND
                    IDENTIFICATION DATA  TO ESTIMATE SEWAGE
                    AT  8 POINTS
                                  82

-------
                                Table 6-1.  ALLOWABLE NUMBER OF SEWER CONNECTIONS

                                            BY CITY  SIZE AND GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION
oo
u>
Connections
Swimming
Pools

Combined Sewers
City size
0-10,000
10,001-25,000
25,001-100,000
100,001-1,000,000
Over 1,000,000
Geographic location
East
South
Midwest
Southwest
West
Total
Storm Sewers
City size
0-10,000
10,001-25,000
25,001-100,000
100,001-1,000,000
Over 1,000,000
Yes


—
8
9
13
—

15
1
7
1
5
29


—
14
27
21
1
No


—
4
3
2
—

5
—
4
—
—
9


—
5-
6
5
—
Foundation
Drains
Yes




9
10
12



15
2
9
1
4
31




19
32
23
1
No




3
2
3



5
—
2
—
1
8




2
2
3
—
Are Allowed for the discharge of
Roof
Leaders
Yes




8
5
12



14
1
5
1
4
25




18
35
25
1
No




4
7
3



6
1
6
—
1
14




2
1
2
— —
Sump
Yes




10
11
14



17
2
10
1
5
35




15
26
23
1
Pump
No




2
1
1



3
—
1
—
—
4




5
4
5
1
Treated
Cooling Industrial
Water Process Water
Yes No




8 3
9 2
15



15 3
2
10 1
1
4 1
32 5




16 2
27 6
28 1
1
Yes


—
6
8
12
—

13
2
7
1
3
26


—
6
15
16
— —
No


—
4
1
1
—

2
—
2
—
2
6


—
7
13
7
1
Untreated
Industrial
Process Water
Yes


—
5
7
9
—

10
1
6
1
3
21


—
5
4
8
•——
No


—
4
2
3
—

5
1
2
—
1
9


—
6
19
15
~ —
      Source:  APWA, "Water Pollution Aspects  of  Urban Runoff," January 1969,  WP-20-15 (Ref.  1)

-------
prior to and during runoff.  Roof leaders, foundation drains, and sump




pump connections were not considered in the realm of DWf to the extent




that they provide alternate paths for surface runoff and, therefore,




affect the travel time of runoff to storm and combined sewers.  Industrial




flows are input to  the Transport Model via FILTH.






Methodology




Model development relied heavily on major research programs conducted at




the Johns Hopkins University (Ref. 2).  These efforts were concerned with




quantitative formulations of residential and commercial water usage




patterns based on extensive programs of meter installation and data




review.  The residential work clearly exceeded the scope, magnitude, and




depth of consideration of any work preceding it.  It was national in




scope and utilized advanced statistical techniques for data evaluation.




The commercial usage study, on the other hand, was centered about




Baltimore, Maryland.  Because of its well organized approach and thorough-




ness, the commercial water use study has validity for use on a national




scale, as well.  Additional estimates of water use were obtained from a




computerized water use study by Hittman and Associates from Columbia,




Maryland  (Ref. 3), and a summary of water use in manufacturing from the




U. S. Census Bureau (Ref. 4).






Based upon the previously mentioned objectives and constraints, the




structure and logic of FILTH was developed to read and edit input data,




make necessary flow estimates,  and coordinate flow estimates as inputs to




the Transport Model (subroutine TRANS).  FILTH was structured to




give priority to sewage flow and metered water use data as predictors of







                                  84

-------
wastewater flow.  If estimates were necessary for commercial and indus-



trial subareas, water use coefficients provided in the "User's Manual"



(subroutine FILTH) provided the necessary input (Refs. 2,3,5).  Flow



estimates for residential areas are made within the computer program



using water use estimating equations developed in the Johns Hopkins



Residential Water Use Study.





Estimating equations for residential water use were taken from the work



done by Linaweaver.  From analysis of water use throughout the country,



Linaweaver stated that the principal factor influencing total annual



water use in any residential area is the total number of homes.  Three



other major factors are:  economic level of the consumer, climate, and



whether consumers are metered or on a flat rate basis.





Income level of the consumer influences domestic water for  two primary



reasons.  According to Linaweaver"s investigations, consumers in a high-



valued area have more water-using appliances.  As  a result,  domestic  use



is  likely to increase because the average time between uses decreases



while the average duration per  use increases.  To  verify  this assumption,



Linaweaver analyzed water use data from 29 areas  and  developed the



following regression equation:





                          Q,.   =  178 +  3.28v                         (1)
                            Q/cl




where  Q, ,   = Average  domestic  use per  dwelling unit (gpd)
        cl/a


       v     = Average  assessed  valuation of property (thousands  of



                dollars)
                                    85

-------
Subsequent analysis of residential water demand by Howe and Linaweaver




 (Ref. 6) resulted in the following equation:







                       qa,d = f(v'a'V k' V                        (2)





where  q     =  Average annual quantity demanded for domestic purposes
        cl f Q.



                 (gpd per dwelling unit)



       v     =  Market value of the dwelling unit (thousands of dollars)




       a     =  Age of the dwelling unit (yr)




       d     —  Number of persons per dwelling unit




       k     =  Average water pressure (psi)




       p     =  Sum of water and sewage charges that vary with water
        Vr


                use, evaluated at the block rate applicable to the




                average domestic use in each drainage basin






After extensive analysis of water use data from 21 eastern and western




drainage basins, variabilities in average water use due to the existence




of public sewers, flat rate pricing, and apartments were statistically




blocked out.  Regression of average daily water use on the remaining




variables yielded the following linear equations for the type of resi-




dential areas specified.






          Metered with public sewer:
                     q    = 206 + 3.47v - 1.30 p                     (3)
                      a,d                      *w
          Flat rate and apartments with public sewer:
                     q  , = 28.9 + 4.39v + 33.6d                     (4)
                      a,d                       p
                                   86

-------
          Metered with septic tanks:




                          q  , = 30.2 + 39.5d                        (5)
                          ^a,d               p




TEST APPLICATIONS


Preliminary testing of FILTH was accomplished through the use of data



from the Johns Hopkins University Residential Sewerage Research Project.



A summary of the results of this testing is given in Table 6-2 and



Figures 6-2 to 6-6.  For subcatchments less than 130 acres in size, it



can be seen that deviations may be as high as 108 percent and average



nearly 40 percent of recorded flow.  However, application to one 3,400-



acre drainage basin in San Francisco resulted in underestimation of



sewage flow by only 12 percent.  Similar accuracy was noted in  the veri-



fication  applications of  the  Storm Water Management  Model as described



in Volume II of  this  report.  The significance of the seemingly large



variability of estimates  in  small upstream subcatchments lies in the



establishment of initial  flow in the sewers  prior to the occurrence  of



runoff.   Extreme upstream branches of the  sewer  may  have dry weather flows



that  are  somewhat above or below actual conditions.   These discrepancies



are soon  dampened, however,  as  flows accumulate  downstream and have  been



shown to  be  less than 12  percent at  the outfall.




During testing of FILTH,  it was noted that recorded dry weather sewage



 flows and quality exhibited definite variation depending on the time of



 the  day and  day  of the week.  These  variations were accounted for in



 FILTH by correcting estimated flow by hourly and daily flow correction



 factors.   These  factors can be determined from historical flow records as



 described in the "User's Manual."




                                     87

-------
                           Table 6-2.  ACTUAL AND ESTIMATED DAILY AVERAGE RESIDENTIAL

                                       SANITARY  SEWER FLOWS TO TEST VALIDITY OF SUBROUTINE FILTH
00
CD
1
Measured*
Area, Sewage Flow,
Gaging Area acres gpm
Bradenton ^^
(Florida)
IS1?°^ • x 34 24-50
(California)
Nutwood . , _ __ r_.
112 87 . 50
(Maryland)
Valley Wood
,_,.., . . bJ li.bb
(California)
Springfield gg 3? 5g
(Missouri)
.„,.,_ . . 12 11.18
(California)
Pine Valley 4? 45 2Q
(Maryland)
(corrected)
2 3
Estimated Deviation Measured Deviation
Water Use, 2-1 Water Use, 3-1
gpm gpm percent gpm gpm percent
57.50 +11.18 24.1% 38.20 - 8.12 17.5%
22.40 - 2.10 8.6 24.70 + 0.20 8,8
85.92 - 1.58 1.8 95.54 + 8.04 9.1
24.34 +12.68 108.7 19.59 + 7.93 68.0
49.10 +11.51 30.6 28.10 - 9.49 25.2
19.64 + 8.46 75.7 10.86 - 0.32 2.8
25.18 -20.02 44.3 31.58 -13.62 30.1

      *Except for Pine Valley  (corrected),  flow includes groundwater  infiltration and storm water penetration.

-------
CO
                                                                 BRADENTON  GAGING AREA
                                                                           1961
                                     -i . i l i i l i i i i i i i i  i l l i t i I I I I I  I II I I I II I I I I I LJ
                                     I  19  I* I It  26 8  II  It  I  I* It t l»  *• »  II II  I  II  II
                                                          HPT.    OCT.   HOY
                                                                                   LIHAWIAVIR'l , ,7 .,
                                                                                   RE..I11 0.

                                                                                   AVCRAtC (««.!)
                                                                                _ _ WINTER
                                                                                   • ATIR U$l
                       10
                                                 BRAOENTON  GAGING  AREA
                                                            1962
-n n i ill  ll i  l l l l l i l i i i i  i i i i i l i i  I i i i i i I l il  I I	I I I I I I 1 I II 1 I  I I I I I I I I
 a  is  » i   i* it  t  it it t  it  » t  it it  t  i>  i* t  it n  t  II t»  l  II tl I  it it  I  it » i
 JAN.    H*.     MAR.     APR,    MAY      JUNE   JULY   All*.    MPT.   OCT.     NOV.
                         Source:  F.  P. Linaweaver/  "Final and Summary  Report on the
                                   Residential  Water  Use Research Project," July  1966
                                    (Ref. 2).
                              Figure  6-2.  TEST RESULTS, BRADENTON  (FLORIDA) GAGING AREA

-------
.
                                                     VALLEY  WOOD GAGING  AREA
                                                                  1962
                                                                                                           LINAWEAVEII'S ,
                     JA«.     FES.
                                                                                                 \7

                                                                                               I  I I I
                                                                                                          — WINTEN   ,,« „
                                                                                                       1	1  WATCH USE
                                                                                                            AVCRASE  (117)
                               >6 *»  «  II  21 9  15  26  0  TT26  5 Ts25 S  IS  2S  S  It  26  I  IS 25
                               MAY     JUNE    JULr    AUO.   SEPT.      OCT.     HOY.      DEC
                                                         ALVY  GAGING  AREA
                                                                   I 962
I I i
                        i i  i i Y i I  I I I I i  i i i i  i i t i i  i i i i i  i i i i  i I I i I i  i I ................ i ..... l i I  I
                         '*  *..." " *  '*. "  *  " "  *  " "  •'•»••  l» «• •  '5 25  6  II 25  I  15 25 >  15  21  5
                             '••      MAN.     APR.      MAT     JUNE    JULY    AU6.   SEPT.      OCT     NOV
                                                                                                      LINAWE AVEH'S , ,
                                                                                                      REGRESSION
                                                                                                      * V E B » 6 t  ( 11.2)
                                                                                                      WINTCN   . lft .
                                                                                                      • ATEd USE ' ">••!
                                                                                                      JATE.'UIC (14'T1
                                                                                                      AVEH A8C ( 24.8)
                                                                                                      L ih A WE AVEN'S
                                                                                                      • t;»ni ON  (11.4)
                    I  I I I I  I I I I  I I I I I I I  I I I  I I I I I  I I I I I  I I I I  I I I I I I  I I I  I I 1 I I  I I I I I  I I I I I  I I I
                    S  IS IS  I  II 21  5  IS 11  I   IS  IS  S  IS 25  5  IS  2S S  IS  IS  S  IS 25  S  16 25  I  IS 25  S  IS  II S
                     J*".     '".      BAB.    APR.      MAY      JUNE    JULY    AU«.   SEPT.     OCT.     MOV.
                    Source:   F.  P. Linaweaver,  "Final and Summary  Report on  the  Residential Water
                               Use Research  Project,"  July 1966 (Ref. 2).
                  Figure  6-3.   TEST  RESULTS, VALLEY WOOD, ALVY, AND FALCON  (CALIFORNIA) GAGING  AREAS

-------
                                             NUTWOOD GAGING AREA
                                                     1961
                            i I i I I i I i i  I I  i I i i i I i i  i i I i I I I I I i I i I i i i i I i i  i i i i I I i I i i i I
.
                                              NUTWOOD  GAGING AREA
                                                      1962
                                                                                         W-
                         i I! »«  I  II
                         JAM.     fit.
                                       HAH.   APR.    MAY
I  ID Z»  5  It 25 S
OCT.     HOV.
                        Source:   F.  F. Linaweaver, "Final and  Summary Report on the
                                  Residential Water Use Research  Project," July 1966
                                  (Ref. 2).
                            Figure  6-4.   TEST RESULTS, NUTWOOD  (MARYLAND)  GAGING AREA

-------
•
                                                            PINE VALLEY  GAGING AREA
                                                                      1961
                                                                                    AWCAVC M S
                                                                       NOV.    DEC.
                                                    PINE VALLEY GAGING AREA
                                                               1962
                      I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I III I I I I I IM I I I 111 I I I I I I I I I I I
                                                                               OCT.    NOV.     DCC.
                     Source:   F. P. Linaweaver, "Final and  Summary  Report on the Residential
                              Water Use Research Project,"  July  1966  (Ref.  2)
                           Figure 6-5.  TEST RESULTS, PINE VALLEY  (MARYLAND)  GAGING AREA

-------

 SPRINGFIELD GAGING  AREA
             1962
                              ~/u. Iv \ r
                                                          .
         (411)


AVI »» C E ( >7.<)
                                   SPRINGFIELD GAGING AREA
                                               1961
        nl I I  I I I I I I I I I I I I  I I I | | | | | | | |  | I I I I I I I I  I I I I I I I I I I  I I I I I I I I I I I
        18 21  t  If 21 f  Ift 2»  I  II  21 t  li tl  •  IB 2f f  19  21 ft  15 25  8  IB  21 5  It IS
        UAH.    AFN.     HAT     JUNK    JULY   AU0.   (KPT.    OCT.    NOV.     DIG.
     Source:  F.  P.  Linaweaver,  "Final  and Summary  Report on  the
              Residential Water  Use Research Project," July 1966
               (Ref.  2)
Figure  6-6.  TEST RESULTS, SPRINGFIELD  (MISSOURI) GAGING AREA

-------
CONCLUSION




The Dry Weather Flow model was developed to represent DWF quantity and




quality for periods prior to and during storm runoff in the physical




sewer system being studied.  Using a regression analysis concept similar




to the research accomplished by Linaweaver, the model is dependent on




the availability of input data for a predictive comparison with the real




world.  The Johns Hopkins University Residential Research Project was




used for testing the model.  The percent error between model results and




recorded flows at the outfall averaged to a reasonable amount when




validating the model.  Thus, the methodology presented herein proved to




be satisfactory during its demonstration.
                                  94

-------
                               SECTION 7




                           INFILTRATION MODEL




                                                                   Page





OBJECTIVES                                                          97




THE MODEL SUBROUTINE                                                98




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                             98




     Input Data                                                     99




     Methodology                                                    100




          High Groundwater Table  (GINFIL)                           101




          Estimation of Antecedent Precipitation  (RINFIL)           103




          Estimation of Residual Melting Ice and Frost




            Infiltration  (SINFIL)                                   103




          Apportionment of Infiltration                             104




TEST APPLICATION                                                    107




CONCLUSION                                                          107
                                    95

-------
                                SECTION 7




                           INFILTRATION MODEL






In order to arrive at a model to determine the relative contribution of




infiltration to flow and quality in combined sewers, two primary assump-




tions were made.  It was assumed that a model could be developed to re-




flect the availability, movement, and entry of moisture into a subsurface




conduit.  The effect of infiltration upon quality was assumed negligible




except for some dilution.






The present state of the art was such that actual flow measurements of




infiltration for comparison to predictions were unavailable.  This con-




straint was overcome by using minimum and average daily sewage flow data




recorded on the Johns Hopkins University Residential Sewerage Research




Project (Ref. 1).  An analysis of the Infiltration  model  is presented in




the remainder of this section.






OBJECTIVES




The incorporation of the Infiltration modal,  subroutine INFIL, into the




overall Storm Water Management Model and its  adaptability to local




variations and characteristics were of prime concern.  Thus, in the




development of INFIL, the objectives were:




     1.  To predict accurately infiltration into a given sewer system on




         the basis of existing local information about the sewer, its




         surrounding soil and groundwater, precipitation,  and other




         climatological data.
                                   97

-------
     2.  To apportion the predicted infiltration  at discrete locations

         along  the  given trunk sewers prior  to  flow routing.



THE MODEL SUBROUTINE
 The  computer program developed  to  perform the infiltration computation is

 subroutine INFIL.



 Subroutine INFIL is called from TRANS  to compute the infiltration  from

 groundwater,  antecedent precipitation,  and ice and frost melting.

 The  infiltration is then combined  with  the DWF quantity computed in

 FILTH  to  yield the base flow in the  sewer.



 THEORETICAL  DEVELOPMENT

 A typical  urban drainage basin  in  which infiltration might be estimated

 for  use by the Storm Water Management Model is shown in Figure  7-1.
                                                 LATERAL SEWERS
                                                 CONDUITS TO WHICH TOTAL
                                                INFILTRATION IS APPORTIONED
                                                 DRAINAGE BASIN BOUNDARY
                                                 NON-CONDUIT ELEMENT
              Figure 7-1.   TYPICAL DRAINAGE BASIN IN WHICH
                            INFILTRATION IS TO BE ESTIMATED


-------
In the preliminary stages of model development consideration was given




to the use of existing mathematical relationships representing flow




through porous media.  The complexity and inflexibility of these relation-




ships (Ref. 2), together with the stochastic nature of the real problem,




led to the selection of empirical methods.






Initial attempts were made to develop a general predictive equation of




nationwide applicability for infiltration, as presented in Appendix A.




The equation incorporated an antecedent precipitation index, pipe diameter,




pipe length, and factors denoting soil type and joint material.  However,




it failed to account for abrupt flow changes and exhibited trends that only




approximated local conditions and measurements.  This lack of sensitivity




to local conditions was further accentuated upon comparison with infiltra-




tion measurements taken by M&E in a study for the EPA on storm water




problems and control in sanitary sewers in a six-city area along the




east shore of San Francisco Bay  (Ref. 3).  The results of this comparison,




however, led to the development of the present model.






Input Data




The availability of input data, therefore, was the key factor in devel-




oping the model.  An analysis of variance on time-dependent variables and




minimum flows was conducted on each of seven study areas from the Johns




Hopkins study after obtaining supplementary climatological and geological




information  (Ref. 4).  Data manipulation went as follows:




     1.  Determination of the existence of regression using the following




         recorded data:




         a.  Precipitation






                                    99

-------
         b.  Temperature

         c.  Relative humidity

         d.  Study area sewer descriptive parameters.

     2.  Elimination of variables accounting for the least amount of

         variance.

     3.  Transformation of remaining variables to obtain better correla-

         tion and regression as follows:

         a.  Use of time delays from one to six days on rainfall

         b.  Use of precipitation index to indicate soil moisture con-

             ditions.


From the above data manipulations, only precipitation significantly

accounted for minimum flow variation in each study area.  However,

groundwater level was considered in the model when it occurred above the

sewer invert, in which case the sewer was submerged and all infiltration

was assumed due to this condition (Ref. 5).  Data describing pipe size

and the number of joints were retained to reflect entry of infiltration

into conduits (Ref. 6).  Infiltration into manholes was considered neg-

ligible, therefore elminating any need for manhole infiltration data.


Methodology

For analytical purposes, infiltration includes (1) moisture from miscel-

laneous sources causing a base dry weather inflow, (2) frozen residual

moisture, (3)  antecedent precipitation, and (4) high groundwater. Based

upon this assumption, infiltration was defined as:
                       \DINFIL + RINFIL + SINFIL
               QINF =  <           or                                 (1)
                       (GINFIL for high groundwater table
                                  100

-------
where  QINF    =  Total infiltration

       DINFIL  =  Dry weather infiltration

       RINFIL  =  Wet weather infiltration -  DINFIL

       SINFIL  =  Melting residual ice and snow infiltration

       GINFIL  =  Groundwater infiltration

The cumulative effect of the first three sources can be seen in Figure

7-2 which shows total infiltration as the sum of dry weather infiltration,

wet weather infiltration, and melting residual ice and frost infiltration.

However, in cases where the groundwater table occurs above the sewer in-

vert, it was assumed that groundwater alone would be the dominant source

of infiltration.


High Groundwater Table  (GINFIL).  For locations and times of the year

that cause the groundwater table  to be above the sewer invert, ground-

water infiltration, GINFIL, supersedes any notation of DINFIL, RINFIL,

and SINFIL, as shown in Eq. 1.  GINFIL is  then determined from historical

sewer flow data, by inspection  or regression analysis.  Regression  analy-

sis involves the determination  of the coefficients in  the following

equation:

                              n
                    GINFIL =  Z   (BETA(i))  (GWHD)ai                  (2)
                             i=l


where   GINFIL   =  Groundwater infiltration

        GWHD    =  Groundwater table elevation above sewer invert (ft)

        BETA(i)  =  Coefficient for ith term in equation

        ai      =  Power to which GWHD is raised in ith term, e.g.,

                   0,  1, 2,  1/2 for term i = 0, 1, 2, and 3, respectively
                                    101

-------
                          TIME
QINF   = Total infiltration
DINFIL = Dry weather infiltration
RINFIL = Wet weather infiltration
SINFIL = Melting residual ice and snow infiltration
RSMAX  = Residual moisture peak contribution
SMMDWF = Accounted for sewage flow
           Figure 7-2.  COMPONENTS OF INFILTRATION
                              102

-------
 Estimation of Antecedent Precipitation (RINFIL) .   Using available precip-




 itation and average sewer flow data not affected by melting (Ref . 1) ,




 RINFIL was estimated vising the following linear relationship:
       RINFIL - ALF +  (ALFQ) (RNQ) +  (ALF^ (RN^ + . . .+  (ALFg) (RNg)      (3)






 where  RINFIL  =  SWFLOW - DINFIL - SMMDWF




        ALFN    =  Coefficient to rainfall for N days prior to estimate,



                   N = 0, 1, ..., 9




        DINFIL  =  Average dry weather flow minus the accountable sanitary



                   flow




        RNN     =  Precipitation on N days prior to estimate  (in.),



                   N = 0, 1, ..., 9




        SWFLOW  =  Daily average sewer flow excluding surface runoff  (gpm)




        SMMDWF  =  Accounted for sewage flow (gpm)





 In establishing this relationship for RINFIL, the characteristics of  the




 local soil conditions  are being taken into consideration indirectly.




 The uniqueness  of this estimate and the  nep* for establishing localized




 relationships is  thus  indicated.






 Estimation of Residual Melting Ice  and Frost Infiltration (SINFIL) .   The




 length of  the melting  period as well as  the rate of melting was calculated



 by  using published data (Ref.  7)  in the  form of degree-days as  an index.




 Degree-day (NDD)  is  a  unit  based upon temperature  difference and time.




 Based on observed relationships between  the  degree-days and melting




periods in various geographical locations,  the  value of 750 degree-days




was selected as the  indicator  of the point in time at  which residual ice
                                   103

-------
and snow would start accumulating and also as an indicator of the onset

of the melting period.


As shown in Figure 7-3, the portion of the curve falling above 750 degree-

days corresponds to the period of accumulation.  The beginning of

melting, MLTBE, is taken as the day on which NDD drops below 750.  This

melting period is assumed to end at that point in time (MLTEN) in which

the area representing accumulated precipitation, A , equals the area A

during the melting period.  Therefore, residual melting ice and frost

infiltration (SINFIL)  is determined by the following equation:
             SINFIL
                       RSMAX
      JSin  180 |(NDYUD - MLTBE)\  I
      I    I    I(MLTEN - MLTBE)|J J
0.0 if the day under study is not
in the melting period or if NDD
never exceeds 750                             (4)
where  SINFIL  =  Melting residual ice and snow infiltration

       MLTBE   =  Day on which melting period begins

       MLTEN   =  Day on which melting period ends

       NDYUD   »  Day on which infiltration estimate is desired

       RSMAX   =  Residual moisture peak contribution

In the absence of evidence to the contrary, the rate of melting is assumed

to be sinusoidal.  This is shown in Figure 7-4 where RSMAX represents the


maximum contribution from residual moisture and is determined from pre-

vious gaging of the study area or from local estimates.


Apportionment of Infiltration.  Once an estimate of local infiltration,

QINFIL, has been obtained, this flow must be apportioned throughout the

designated study area.  The criterion chosen for apportionment is an
                                   104

-------
JUNE
                          DATE
 MLTBE  =  Day on which melting period begins
 MLTEN  =  Day on which melting period ends
         Figure 7-3.  PRESCRIBED MELTING PERIOD
                            105

-------
                                                               RSMAX
        •MLTBE
MLTEN-
RSMAX = Residual moisture peak contribution
MLTBE = Day on which melting period begins
MLTEN = Day on which melting period ends
                 Figure 7-4.   RATE OF MELTING
                              106

-------
opportunity factor, OPINF, which represents the relative number and

length of openings susceptible to infiltration.  Pipe joints constitute

the primary avenue for entry of infiltration.  OPINF for an entire study

area is determined by summing over all conduits the product of the peri-

meter of the conduit and the number of joints in each conduit, that is:
                                (conduit  \
                                perimeter!
                                         /
number of   \
joints in    I
each conduit/
(5)
TEST APPLICATION

Preliminary testing of INFIL was accomplished through the use of minimum

daily sewage flow data recorded in the Pine Valley (Maryland) area on the

Johns Hopkins University Residential Sewerage Research Project.  Figure

7-5 presents the results of a comparison of measured and predicted sewer

flow.


CONCLUSION

The  INFIL model, was developed to estimate infiltration into a given

sewer system based upon existing information about the sewer, its sur-

rounding soil and groundwater, precipitation, and clirnatological data.

Using these data, INFIL estimates average daily infiltration at discrete

locations along the trunk sewers of a given sewer system.  Minimum flow

data supplied by the Johns Hopkins University Residential Sewerage Research

 Project were  used to  overcome the  constraint imposed by a lack of actual

 flow measurements on  infiltration,  and in this preliminary demonstration,

 the model proved to be satisfactory.
                                   107

-------
    100 -I

-•
~
.
     10-
                                      Measured Sewer Flow
                                                                               RINFIL
                                        OCT.
        RINFIL = Wet weather  infiltration
        DINFIL = Dry weather  infiltration
        ADWF   = Average daily dry  weather flow
        SMMDWF = Accounted  for sewage flow
               Figure 7-5.  TEST  RESULTS, PINE VALLEY  (MARYLAND)

-------
The INFIL model is not intended to represent direct or illegal connec-




tions to a combined or separate sewer system.  The short response time




of such connections is better represented through adjustments in the




impurviousness ratio of the Runoff Model.
                                   109

-------
                               SECTION 8




                            TRANSPORT MODEL








                                                                 Page




OBJECTIVES                                                        U3




     Sewer Routing                                                113




     Component Tasks                                              115




THE MODEL SUBROUTINE                                              116




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                           117




     Overall Model                                                117




          Input Data                                              117




          Element Sequencing                                      119




          inflows                                                 121




     Flow Routing by the Transport Model                          121




          The Transport Model Routing Technique                   121




          Stability of the Finite Difference Scheme               127




          Surcharging and Flow Routing in Manholes                128




          Flow Routing at Lift Stations                           128




          Use of Flow Dividers                                    128




          Flow Routing at Internal Storage Units                  129




          Modeling of Bakcwater Conditions                        129




TEST APPLICATION  (Conduit Routing Method)                         132
                                  111

-------
                              SECTION 8
                           TRANSPORT MODEL

OBJECTIVES
Simulation of urban rainfall-runoff-quality processes necessarily in-
volves consideration of flow in storm and/or combined sewers.   Adequate
representation of the response of urban catchments to precipitation inputs
thus requires a proper representation of unsteady, non-uniform, free-
surface flow Which is predominant throughout sewers.   In addition, pre-
diction of flow quantities at various points within sewer systems,
rather than only at the outfall, is desirable in order to study the
effect of possible surcharging, overflow and diversion structures,
proposed system modifications, and, in general, the overall capacity of
sewer systems to handle storm runoff.  Such a routing model may then
serve also as a prerequisite to studies of quality parameter behavior
in sewer systems.
Sewer Routing
An accurate representation of velocity and deoth of flow (or flow rate
and  flow area) along a sewer system can be found from the solution, of
the "shallow water" or "St. Venant" equations ,that are  the general
governing equations for gradually varied, unsteady flow  (Ref. 1).:.

                                *  !£'  V.'«

                               +  r -»

-------
where  y   =  Depth



       v   =  Velocity



       k   =  Longitudinal distance



       t   =  Time



       g   =  Gravitational acceleration



       S   =  Invert slope
        o


       S   =  Friction slope



       Q   =  Flow rate



       A   =  Flow area





Eq. 1 is the dynamic equation and Eq. 2 is the continuity equation, with



the assumption of no lateral inflows.  In the absence of abrupt transi-



tions  (e.g., hydraulic jumps, bores), it is commonly accepted that



solutions to the St. Venant equations offer a good description of the



actual flow phenomena (Refs. 1,2).  Unfortunately, solutions must be



obtained numerically, and are usually arrived at using the method of



characteristics (Refs. 1,2,3).  This technique has been applied to



sewer systems (Ref. 4) and has been found to be too consumptive of



computer time for general applications.  Thus, approximate techniques



must be used in order to obtain a satisfactory flow routing method at a



reasonable expenditure of computation time.





Traditional computations of flows and depths in sewer systems involve



the assumption of uniform flow and normal depth in the computation of



extremes and means and do not attempt to follow the progress of individ-



ual storm hydrographs in the system (Ref. 5).  Eagleson (Ref. 6) has



shown the applicability of the unit hydrograph concept to the prediction
                                  114

-------
of hydrographs at the outfall of sewered areas.   Owing to the nature of




unit hydrograph techniques, such a method produces predicted hydrographs




only at points in the system where prior flow measurements have been




made and only for storms of specified duration.   The technique also does




not separate flow routing in sewer systems from flow routing of rainfall




to sewer inlets.  Unit hydrograph techniques thus lack the desired




generality for application to all quantity and quality processes in




sewer systems.






A recent approach to routing of urban runoff has been developed by




Britain's Road Research Laboratory  (Ref. 7).  The RRL model, as it is




called, has been applied to the prediction of outfall hydrographs with




encouraging results  (Ref. 8).  However, it lacks the versatility required




to model all components of a large  system.  In addition, tests  conducted




in the present research have shown  it to lack accuracy when  applied  to




long lengths of conduits with no intermediate inflows.






Component Tasks




A routing method has thus been developed to compute hydrographs accurately




at all points in a given sewer system while avoiding  the necessity for




solving the St. Venant equations.   Evaluation of the  model was  subsequently



done to judge its ability  to reproduce measured  hydrographs  in  real




systems under a wide variety of situations with  minimal  time and expense




to the user.






Component tasks performed by the Transport Model are  to:




     1.  Coordinate  user input data
                                   115

-------
     2.  Prepare routing sequence through trunk sewers




     3.  Coordinate surface runoff, infiltration, and wastewater quality




         and quantity inputs




     4.  Route flows through various conduit cross-sections and sewer




         appurtenances




     5.  Represent in-system storage, surcharging, and backwater




         condi tions




     6.  Coordinate output to other programs and the user.






THE MODEL SUBROUTINE
The computer program developed to perform the computations for flow routing




in the sewers consists of the following 12 major subroutines: TRANS,




TSTRDT, SLOP, FIRST, INFIL, FILTH, DWLOAD, INITAL, ROUTE, QUAL, PRINT,




and TSTCST.






Subroutine TRANS provides the necessary liaison with the master Storm




Water Water Management  Model.   TRANS also  performs certain functions




in relation to quantity routing which is described in the "User's Manual."






Subroutine TSTRDT, when used, reads  in data to identify internal storage




basins (those occurring at locations other than at the outlet of the




system) .






SLOP is called by TRANS to sequence  the sewer element data for the later




computations.






FIRST is called by TRANS to perform  the initial computations of constants




and flow parameters for each sewer element.
                                  116

-------
INFIL is called by TRANS to estimate and allocate sewer infiltration.




INFIL is discussed in Section 7 of this report.






FILTH is called by TRANS to compute the average DWF quality and quantity.




The DWF quantity and quality computations are discussed further in




Sections 6 and 12, respectively, of this report.






DWLOAD is called by TRANS to compute the initial conditions of sedimentation




within the sewer based upon the number of dry weather days prior to




the storm.






INITAL is called by TRANS to initialize flows, areas, and pollutant




concentrations to values corresponding to DWF plus infiltration.






ROUTE is called by TRANS to route the flow through the sewer elements.






QUAL is called by TRANS to route the pollutants  through the sewer elements.






PRINT is called by TRANS to print the total hydrographs and pollutographs




for the desired elements.






TSTORG is called by ROUTE to compute flow storage within  the sewer




system.  TSTORG is discussed further in Section  9.






THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT




.Overall Model




Jnput Data.  To categorize sewer systems conveniently prior to  flow




touting, each component of a system is classified as a certain  type  of




Sewer "element."  All elements in combination  form a conceptual represen-




tation of a system in a manner similar to that of links and nodes.
                                  117

-------
Elements may be classified as conduits, manholes, lift stations, storage




units, or other appurtenances by specifying element types, e.g., manhole




(type 16), circular conduit  (type 1), and storage unit (type 19).




Conduits themselves may be of different types depending upon their




geometrical cross-section (e.g., circular, rectangular, horseshoe, etc.).




Data input has been structured so as to allow element description on a




"one element per data card" basis.






During preliminary development of the Transport Model, it was noted that




the number of elements used to represent any given sewer system would




necessarily have to be limited to less than 150 to conserve computer




core space; approximately half of the elements would necessarily be




devoted to non-conduits, leaving only 75 to conduits.  To overcome this




limitation, it was decided to defer consideration of the numerous and




smaller lateral conduits and to aggregate remaining trunk conduits, if




necessary.  So as not to neglect the effect of lateral sewers upon flow




routing, it was agreed that they would be considered as special gutters




and, therefore, incorporated into surface runoff routing.  Any necessary




aggregation of remaining trunk conduits will be left essentially to




judgment on the part of the user.  However, an upper limit of approxi-




mately 3,000 feet will avoid inaccuracy in flow routing due to extremely




large conduit length.  Conduit elements of less than this length would




be defined whenever significant changes in cross-section, slope, rough-




ness, or incoming branches occur at shorter distances.  Although criteria




ultimately relate to changes in conduit flow-area relationships, it




remains for the user to determine which changes are significant enough
                                  118

-------
to warrant defining a new conduit element.   Reference  to Figure  8-1




should assist in describing sewer elements  by showing  an example sewer




element schematic.






Non-conduit elements serve as convenient boundaries in the finite dif-




ference scheme used in conduit flow routing by providing for flow input,




diversion, and storage.  The most useful type of non-conduits are man-




holes, providing input locations for surface runoff, wastewater, infil-




tration, and upstream conduit flows and storage of temporary surcharging




from downstream conduits.  Thus, manholes would logically be placed as




the most upstream element on each branch of the trunk system to allow




flow input.  All conduits should be linked by non-conduits, either to




represent real manholes in the system, or to delineate conveniently




changes in slope, roughness, etc., of adjoining conduit sections.







Element Sequencing.  An extremely  flexible  sequencing routine was devel-




oped  to order elements for routing.  As a result,  sewer  elements defined




on  a  sewer system schematic, such  as shown  in Figure 8-1, may be numbered




in  any order desired.  By requiring that each element data  card include




that  element's number  and the numbers of elements  directly  connected




upstream, elements can then be ordered within the  computer  by progres-




sively searching  for elements for  which all upstream elements have been




sequenced for routing.  This progressive searching sequences elements




regardless of the order in which element data are  input.  Thus,  flexi-




bility has been introduced by allowing both random numbering and random




ordering of inputting  elements.
                                  119

-------
       POTOMAC RIVER
Figure 8-1.  SEWER SCHEMATIC FOR THE KINGMAN  LAKE
              (WASHINGTON,  D.C.)  STUDY AREA
                         120

-------
 Inflows.   Non-conduit element numbers  nearest to  the  desired  input point



 for  wastewater and surface  runoff  are  used  to coordinate  inflow.  Waste-



 water flows  estimated for subareas within the study area  are  assumed to



 enter at  non-conduits located near the  center of  each subarea.  Surface



 runoff estimated  for  each subarea within the  study area are assumed to



 enter at  non-conduits located at the downstream point of  each subarea.



 For  convenience,  infiltration flows estimated for each conduit are



 allowed to enter  at the  upstream end of each  respective conduit.





 Flow Routing by the Transport Model



 The  Transport  Model Routing Technique.  The continuity relationship,



 Eq.  2, is  put  into finite difference form, with reference to  Figure 8-2.



 The  subscript  j   denotes upstream conditions  of  flow,  Q,  and area,  A,



 and  the subscript  j  + 1  denotes downstream  conditions.  The subscript



 n  denotes conditions at the  previous time-step,  and  the  subscript  n + 1



 denotes conditions at the new time-step.  The time derivative will be



 weighted   w    at  point   j + 1  and  1  - w   at point  j.  The spatial



 derivative is  weighted   w-'  at time-step  n + 1   and  1 - w   at time-
                         X                                 X


 step  n.   The  continuity equation is then
           (1 - w, ) (A.     - A.  ) + w.  (A. _   _ - A. _  )
          _ t  J,n+l    j,n     t   j+l,n+l    3+l,n
                                 At

                                                                      (3)




                                         •          **	  =  0
                                 Ax




The equations will ultimately be solved by starting at the upstream end



and working downstream.  Thus, at each time-step, the only unknowns will



be the flow and area at the downstream end of the conduit length.  Eq. 3
                                  121

-------
    Qj.n
                        A X

               CONDITIONS  AT
                Element M

                Ax = Dist(M)
              CONDITIONS  AT  t*
   TIME
               M-l
                 t
                At
                __1
                      ELEMENTS
                         M
                        J,n
                              — AX —
Figure 8-2.  FINITE DIFFERENCE DEFINITION SKETCH

             FOR ELEMENT M, ROUTING THROUGH ALL

             ELEMENTS AT EACH TIME-STEP
                       122

-------
can be rearranged to isolate the downstream flow and area.


                    w
                Ax   t                Ax

   Qj+l,n+l  +  At  w~  Aj+l,n+l  +  AtTir  I(1"wt) (Aj,n+l " AJ,n}

                1-w                                                   (4)

   Wt                        -       -         =



Eq. 4 is now normalized vising values of flow and area  for conditions  of


the conduit flowing full, denoted by the subscript  f.  The dimensionless


area is denoted by  a,



                                    A
                                a = —                                (5)
                                    Af


and the dimensionless flow rate by  \l>,




                                                                      (6)
Eq. 4 can then be written
                                            C2
where
                                   Ax w  A-
and


               Ax
        C« =
          2 =  At W
                   JL   £


                                                                      (9)
             1-w
                                   123

-------
Since  the parameters  C.,  and  C2  will be known at each time-step,-



Eq. 7  can be solved if a second relationship between the flow rate and



area is known.  Such a relationship can be found from Eq. 1 after first



defining the friction slope,  S ,  in the usual manner, using Manning's



equation .



                             2                2


                 Sf  =  - T~47J  =  - 2  2  4/3                 (10)
                        i-49  *        1.49  A  R4/3

                          2              2
                         n              n




The variable  R  denotes the hydraulic radius, and  n  is Manning's



roughness.  The simplest result available from Eq. 1 is then obtained



when all the terms on the left hand side are neglected.  The resulting



uniform flow relationship is
                        Q  .   j






If Eq. 11 is normalized by the full-flow values of  Q,  A,  and  R,



there results
                          *-f     A  R
                           f     Af Rf





The normalized flow rate will be a function only of  the normalized  area



since the hydraulic radius is a known function of  the  flow area  for a



given geometry.  The relationship of Eq. 12 is illustrated in Figure 8-3



for three conduit shapes; it may be similarly derived  for any conduit



cross-sectional geometry.





In the development of the Transport Model, the first technique tried



was simply to use Eq. 11  (leading to Eq. 12) , as the required second
                                   124

-------
o-
       •
      1.0-
     0.9
     08
     0.7
     0.6
     0.5
     0.4
     0.3
     0.2-
     0.1
    00
         CIRCULAR
	  SEMI-ELLIPTICAL
	  EGG SHAPED
       0.0     .10    .20    .30   .40    .50    .60    .70    .80    .90    1.0

                                   A/Af
        Figure 8-3.   NORMALIZED FLOW-AREA RELATIONSHIP FOR UNIFORM  FLOW
                                    125

-------
relationship between flow and area.  When Eq. 12 is substituted into

Eq. 7, the resulting non-linear algebraic equation is readily solvable

by the Newton-Raphson method or other techniques.  Hydrographs produced

by this method were good for conduits on relatively steep slopes, but

not as good at low slopes, (on the order of 0.001 or less).  This is to

be expected, since all dynamic terms are neglected, and at low slopes,

backwater effects become appreciable.


In order to improve the predicted hydrographs, yet retain the basic

simplicity of the method, it was decided to include additional terms

from Eq. 1 in the calculation of the slope for use in Eq. 11.  When

Eq. 11 is normalized, the slope parameter disappears.  Hence, the primary

difference is that the full flow rate,  Q_,  must be calculated anew for

each conduit length at each time-step when terms from the left hand side

of Eq. 1 are used.  In particular, it was decided to include the water
                                                      ^
surface slope,  3y/3x,  and velocity head slope,   — T—,  since they
                                                   g  ox

can be calculated from the velocities and areas  at the upstream and

downstream ends of each conduit, known from the  previous time-step.

Then the full flow rate is calculated thus:
               Q   .  idi  A  R2/3  (s  _|v__v|vl/2             (13)
                f      n     f  f      o   3x   g  ox

The derivatives are evaluated in finite difference form at  time-step n.

                                                     22
           3v  _    __3      v\  _  yj,n " y        V     " V
                              ;
                    __
    3x ~ g 3x  ~  ~ 3x      2g           Ax              2gAx
                                                                     (14)
                                   126

-------
When this method was used, agreement between predicted hydrogrphs on low



slopes and a standard of comparison (to be described later)  was consider-



ably improved.  However, undesirable oscillations appeared in the pre-



dicted results.  In an effort to eliminate the oscillations, an iterative



procedure was developed in which, at each time-step,  Q_  was calculated



two or more times for each conduit, using the values of velocity and



depth calculated on the preceding iteration.  The small remaining



oscillations were removed by using a value of  Q.  taken as the average



of the value from the previous iteration, and that just calculated.  If



the subscript  i  represents the number of the iteration, then at iter-



ation  i,
            2         2                                             (15)

           * j.j-1 - vVl.j-1  1/2

                   2g Ax       '





Four  iterations were found  to produce satisfactory results.  When con-



duits have steep  slopes, no iterations are required, and the invert slope,



S   ,  can be used  alone.  In order  to avoid the possibility of a square



root  of a negative number,  the sum of the slope  terms is not allowed to



be  less than   S   .  Since the only change is in  the calculation of  Q,.  ,
               o                                                     z


it  is still necessary only  to substitute Eq. 12  into Eq. 7 and solve for



a   and  ty  .  The  values of  A  and Q  are subsequently obtained from



Eqs.  5 and 6.





Stability of the  Finite Difference Scheme. The stability of the method



can be investigated using the techniques of Ref.  9,- when the equations
                                   127

-------
are linearized.  It is found that the scheme is unconditionally stable"



(i.e., for any choice of  Ax  and  At ), for  w   and  w   both greater
                                               t        X


than 0.5, neutrally stable for  w   and  w   equal to 0.5, and unstable
                                 t.        a


(i.e., errors grow with time) for  w   and  w   less than 0.5.  After
                                    t        X


numerous trials, a value of 0.55 was chosen for  w   and  w   since it
                                                  t        X


resulted in the best attentuation of the hydrograph peaks, as well as



insured stability.





Surcharging and Flow Routing in Manholes.  Flow routing is accomplished



in manholes by specifying that the outflow equals the sum of the inflows.



Head losses at manholes are not considered a factor in trunk sewer flow



routing, but could be accounted for simply by increasing the roughness



coefficient of adjacent conduits.  Unless diverted to an internal (in-



system) storage element, surcharge volume from a downstream conduit is



stored at the upstream manhole.  Surcharged flows offer an additional



flow input whenever excess flow capacity develops in the downstream conduit.







Flow Routing at Lift Stations.  Lift stations are assumed to operate



when wet well volume reaches a designated value which actuates a single,



constant-discharge pump.  Pumping continues until the wet well is emptied.



Flooding caused when wet well capacity is exceeded is not considered.





Use of Flow Dividers.  Flow dividers are programmed to perform in either



of two ways.  The first and simplest type assumes that diverted flow



equals zero until an overflow setting is exceeded, after which all flow



in excess of the setting is diverted.  Junctions for relief sewers,



bypasses, and other overflow structures occasionally perform in this



manner.


                                  128

-------
Flow may also be diverted over a weir, in which case overflow is propor-




tional to head above the weir taken to the 1.5 power.  To determine head




above the weir, flow depth through divider elements is assumed proportional




to the flow rate.  This head is calculated by multiplying the distance




between the weir height and the top of the structure with the ratio of the




incoming flow to the maximum possible flow.  Side weirs as well as end




weirs may be modeled by inputting the appropriate weir constant as data.






Flow Routing at Internal Storage Units.  Flow through storage units located




elsewhere than at the downstream point of a sewer system is routed by speci-




fying a type 19 element.  Storage units may be natural or man-made with




weir and/or orifice outlets.  Three routing options exist, namely, routing




flow without quality, routing flow and quality assuming plug flow, and




routing flow quality assuming complete mixing during each time-step.






The internal version of the Storage Model differs in structure from




external storage (see Section 9) so as to allow more than one storage




unit to serve on a time-step basis as a transport element.  Also, as




storage units at upstream locations will probably be smaller, no quality




improvements, such as by settling, are modeled within internal storage.




Refer to the Storage Model discussion (Section 9) for further description




of storage routing.






Modeling of Backwater Conditions.  An accurate simulation of transient




backwater conditions is not possible without an exact solution of the St.




Venant equations simultaneously throughout the sewer system.  The Transport




Model does, in fact, include backwater effects for flow routing in a given
                                   129

-------
 conduit length by means  of  the  iterative  scheme described previously.




 However,  since upstream  conduits are routed  independently of those down-




 stream and  no  transfer of water depths is made, a continuous backwater




 profile is  not simulated.   The  results  (shown in Figures 8-5, 8-6, and 8-8)




 have  shown  the Transport Model  to be very adequate in spite of this limitation.






 However,  backwater effects  due  to ponding as a result of a flow control




 structure can  be simulated  by a combination of conduit routing and in-




 system storage.  The primary effect of such ponding is for upstream




 flows  to  be  "felt" at the flow  control structure earlier than if they




 were  to flow normally through the intermediate conduits.  The Transport




 Model  simulates this effect by  first assigning an extent of backwater




 by projecting  the water  surface horizontally upstream from the flow




 control structure at maximum depth until  intersecting the invert slope.




 It is  recognized that the actual extent of backwater as determined from




 an exact  calculation would  most probably be further upstream than




 indicated above.  However,  the intention  is to model the "reservoir" or




 "ponding" effect only, and  the assumption of a horizontal water surface




 slope  considerably simplifies this task.  A "backwater element," which




 is actually  a  special type  of flow divider, is then placed at the




 location  of  the extent of backwater, and a storage element is placed at




 the location of the flow control structure.  The concept is illustrated




 in Figure 8-4.






The backwater element is programmed to pass flow directly to the storage




element or to the intermediate conduits, depending upon the amount of




flow currently stored in the backwater region.  In this way the upstream






                                   130

-------
          Sewer
          Inflow,  QI
                             Extent of
                             Backwater
                                 / /
                      Orifice  Flows
                   Into  Intercepting
                   Sewer

                    SEWER PROFILE
    Intercepted
    Flow
                                                                                      Downstream
                                                                                      Weir
.
                  Conduit
                                               Conceptual Flow Path
                                                 to Storac
Backwater
 Element
Type  22
                                                                                 Conduit
                                            Conduit
Manhole
 Element
Type 16
Conduit
                                                                           Storage  Conduit
                                                                            Element
                                                                           Type 19
                            SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF STORAGE IN THE TRANSPORT MODEL
                            Figure 8-4.   TYPICAL IMPLEMENTATION OF A BACKWATER ELEMENT

-------
flows are "felt" at the flow control structure (as simulated in the




operation of the storage element) earlier than if they were routed




totally through the intermediate conduits.  By assuming constant width




for upstream conduits, backwater length can be shown to be proportional




to the square root of current storage within the same upstream elements.




Then at each time-step, the backwater element computes the ratio,  r,




of current to maximum storage volume in the downstream storage element.




Then
                            Q01  =  QI -\                            (16)
and
                           QO2  =  QI - QO1                         (17)







where  Q01  =  Flow directly into storage unit




       Q02  =  Flow into intermediate conduits




       QI   =  Inflow to backwater element







TEST APPLICATION (Conduit Routing Method)




Ideally, the Transport Model should be tested against measured hydrographs




in a real sewer system, but such data were unattainable during the




testing phases.  Hence, an attempt was made to compare predicted flow




hydrographs with depth hydrographs measured in a long circular pipe




(Ref . 3) .  However, comparison of the flows and depths was difficult to




do quantitatively.   Thus, it was decided to develop an exact solution




of Eqs. 1 and 2, and to compare the Transport Model with this solution.




Consequently, a solution was attained numerically using the method of
                                  132

-------
characteristics in a manner similar to that described in Refs.  4 and 10.




This was tested against the measured depth hydro-graphs of Ref.  3 and




found to be in very good agreement.  The characteristics solution was




subsequently used as a basis of comparison of the Transport Model.






Comparisons of hydrographs predicted using the Transport Model and the




characteristics solution can be seen in Figures 8-5 and 8-6 for the




different time-steps and distance increments shown in Figure 8-7.  The




results are good even for the long total length of conduit used in the




tests.  Use of a long test section with no intermediate inflows was




chosen to simulate the most unfavorable simulation conditions since




results would be expected to improve when there were numerous inflows of




known hydrographs along the test section.  A further comparison was




made with the published analytical results of Ackers and Harrison




 (Ref. 11) for a 1-foot diameter pipe on a slope of 0.001.  The results




are equally good, as shown in Figure 8-8.







These tests indicate the Transport Model to be an accurate and reliable




tool for flow routing in sewers.






A comparison of actual and predicted hydrographs of a real sewer system




can be found in Volume II of this report.  A further description of the




solution technique and computer program can be found in the "User's




Manual."
                                   133

-------
ll
           -
          :
               100-
                           Characteristics Solution, x
                           Characteristics Solution, x
                           Characteristics Solution, x
                           Transport Model, DT = 5 min
                           Transport Model, DT = 2 min
5,000 ft
18,000 ft
30,000 ft
                              40
80
                                                      \zo
                                                      FLOW (MIN)
                        Figure  8-5.   COMPARISON OF TRANSPORT MODEL AND EXACT SOLUTIONS FOR
                                      PIPELINE CONSISTING OF 8 CONDUIT LENGTHS

-------
     IOO-I
      80-
-

Characteristics Solution, x
Characteristics Solution, x
Characteristics Solution, x
Transport Model, DT = 5 min
Transport Model, DT = 2 min
5,000 ft
18,000 ft
30,000 ft
                    -vo
                                            TIME  (MIN)
             Figure 8-6.   COMPARISON OF TRANSPORT MODEL AND EXACT SOLUTIONS FOR
                          PIPELINE CONSISTING OF 15  CONDUIT LENGTHS

-------
  8 CONDUIT LENGTHS (ft)


      4,000              4,000
                         1,000
                            6,000
 1,000
4,000
4,000
                                                6,000
  15 CONDUIT LENGTHS  (ft)


  1,000      2,000  1,500     1,000   3,000   1,500
                                           4,000
500   3,500      500     4,000   1,000     500    3,000
                                                   3,000
  DIAM  =   6.0 ft
                   0.001
                                                  N  =     0.012
    A   =  28.27 ft      Q_  =  145.48 cfs     Q     =   157.12  cfs
     £                    £                     IftclX
              108-

          Cn
              28'
                                    Input

                                    Hydrograph
                            40           80      '    300


                                  TIME  (KIN)
          Figure 8-7.  HYPOTHETICAL INPUT FOR ROUTING COMPARISONS
                                     136

-------



                              Transport Model
                              Exact  Solution
                   V / ^
                                                          Input Hydrograph
                                                          x  =   28.4 ft
                                                          x  =  255.7 ft
                                                          x  =  483.0 ft
                                                          x  =  710.2 ft
                  S  =  0.001
                  D  =  1 ft
                  n  =  0.0117
.10
              100
                           2OO
3OO          40O
 TIME  (SEC)
500
                                                                              600
                 Figure 8-8 .   COMPARISON OF TRANSPORT MODEL WITH EXACT SOLUTION
                               OF  ACKERS  AND HARRISON

-------
                              SECTION 9




                            STORAGE MODEL





                                                                 Page




OBJECTIVES                                                        141




BACKGROUND                                                        141




THE MODEL SUBROUTINE                                              144




     Internal Storage                                             144




     External Storage                                             j_4c




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                           145




     Type of Storage                                              145




     Type of Outlet                                               146





     Routing                                                      147




     Through-Flow                                                 148




TEST APPLICATION                                                  14g
                                 139

-------
                              SECTION 9




                            STORAGE MODEL






OBJECTIVES




The objectives of the Storage Model are to:




     1. Determine the modifying effects (attenuating or withholding)




        of various types (intentional or unintentional)  of the storage




        element upon flows through sewer systems.




     2. Simulate the movement of storm water within a storage unit.




     3. Provide data required for the estimation of the costs of the




        specified storage installation.






BACKGROUND




The functions and benefits of storage may be described as:




     1. Reduction of the peak flow rate, thus




        a. Reducing the size needed for a proposed storm drain.




        b. Eliminating the need for a relief storm drain.




        c. Enabling the handling of a, more intense (lesser frequency)




           storm.




     2. Reduction of pollutants in overflows by:




        a. Capturing the solids contained in the first flush.




        b. Providing continuous sedimentation and detention on a




           flow-through basis after storage volume has been filled.




These two uses of storage may not be compatible.  For example, to




reduce the peak it might be desirable to hold the storage in reserve




until the design capacity of the conduit is almost reached and then to
                                 141

-------
divert the excess flow to off-line storage.  On the other hand, to trap




the first flush of solids, the storage must be put in operation early,




and it may be full by the time the peak flow arrives.







To capture the first flush in large drainage basins in flat country




may require a considerable number of small storage tanks located on the




principal branches upstream from the outlet.  Just such a solution was




proposed for large combined sewers in Buffalo by Riis-Carstensen in




1962  (Ref. 1).






In the past, most storage basins were designed as settling tanks and




thus, in addition to storage, provided some degree of treatment through




sedimentation.  Although the design of new storage basins may not be




optimal in terms of sedimentation theory, it is anticipated that some




degree of treatment will be provided.  Recognizing this limitation,




the external version (see below)  of the Storage Model assumes, however,




that a storage basin will function efficiently as a settling tank.




Treatment of pollutants by sedimentation is discussed in Section 15.







Two alternative versions of storage, requiring different modifica-




tions to a basic program, were considered for this study.  The first,




known as "internal" storage, was as one or more small storage tanks




located on major upstream branches of the transport (sewer) system.




Quality improvement (settling) within these smaller units was neglected;




the units were modeled as elements of the transport system (see




Section 8).
                                 142

-------
The second version, known as "external" storage, was as a major




installation at the sewer system outfall.   Many other methods of




sewage treatment besides sedimentation might be provided in addition to




this storage (see Section 15).






With either version, the first running of the Storage Model in a




particular study project was visualized to include only existing storage




reservoirs.  After reviewing the results,  and available locations for




new storage reservoirs, the engineer would select the location and




characteristics of proposed storage units.  The data would then be




read into the computer and the model re-run.






After reviewing these re-run results, additional runs could be made




using reservoirs of different sizes and possibly adding or subtracting




reservoirs at some locations until an acceptable solution is obtained.






The development of the Storage Model was based on the basic storage




equation (outflow = inflow +_ change in storage) with provisions for




alternate facilities, such as holding/routing; artificial/natural;




alternate inlet and outlet controls  (weir, orifice, pumping); and




alternate locations of installation.  While the theory required to




simply model the above features is quite fundamental and well under-




stood, the nature of the flow through the storage unit may be a far




more involved process.  Types of through-flow considered include: plug




flow, complete mixing, and  short-circuiting.
                                  143

-------
 THE MODEL SUBROUTINE




 The Storage Model processes  inflow hydrograph and pollutograph data




 on a  step-by-step basis.  These data would usually have been generated




 by the Transport Model;  it would also be possible to separately




 process data based on observed values.  The time-step method of execu-




 tion  was adopted to simplify incorporation of the program into the




 Transport Model  (internal storage).







 Options of fixed (pumped) or variable (weir or orifice)  outflows are




 provided, together with  alternative types of flow through the reservoir,




 such  as plug flow and complete mixing.






 Internal Storage




 With  the internal version of storage, one or two small storage tanks




 may be located on major  upstream branches of the transport system.




 Quality improvements, such as sedimentation in the tanks, cannot be




 modeled with this version.  The characteristics of the unit(s) to be




 modeled are specified via the Transport Model for internal storage.







 The simulation proceeds on a time-step basis within the Transport




 Model, thus enabling the flows in all transport elements, including




 storage units, to be solved at each time-step, as the inflows become




known.







If the water depth in any storage element exceeds at any time a pre-




viously specified maximum value, the unit is deemed to have flooded and




 the modeling is discontinued.
                                  144

-------
External Storage



With the external version of storage, only a single, and usually major,




installation may be modeled at the sewer system outfall.






The characteristics of the unit are specified, and the execution of




the simulation is governed, by the Storage Block (see "User's Manual")




in this case.  Within the Storage Block many other methods of sewage




treatment may be specified  (see Section 15) in addition to the sedi-




mentation that must occur within the storage unit.






The model accepts as input  the output hydrograph and pollutographs




from the Transport Model which have been  stored on  a disk or tape.




The Storage Block is driven by the Executive Model  quite independently




of other models  (blocks);  flow through storage  and  associated treat-




ment proceeds on a time-step basis.






If the water depth in  the  storage  unit at any time  reaches  a previously




specified maximum value,  an inlet  control structure is assumed to by-




pass  any additional  flows  that would otherwise further increase the




depth.






Output from the Storage Block  (hydrograph and pollutographs)  is again




stored on  a disk or tape,  for possible later use as input to the




 Receiving  Water Model  (both quantity and quality).






THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT



 Type of Storage




 Two basically different types of storage are included.  The first is




 that of an irregular  (natural)  reservoir.  In this case 11 pairs of




                                  145

-------
 depth versus  surface  area data  must be provided by  the user.  The



 second type of  storage  is that  of  a regular  (artificial, man-made)



 unit.   Here the user  must provide  information on  the base area, cir-




 cumference, and side  slopes,  from  which the  depth/surface area relation




 may be computed.






 From  the depth  increments and areas, the depth versus storage relation




 is easily obtained  in either  of the above cases.






 Type  of Outlet




 Orifice and weir outlets  are  included for gravity (variable rate)



 outflows, both  separately and in combination.






 For an orifice  with known effective area C^A (coefficient of discharge




 times  orifice area),  the  outflow (cfs) is computed  from:
                          Qout
where  D  =  Water depth  (ft) above the orifice centerline






For a weir of known height  (above the storage  =  0 level) and



length  L  (ft), the outflow  (cfs) is computed from:






                          Q   . = 3.33 LH1'5
                          *
where  H  =  Head (ft) over the weir crest






Fixed-rate outflows are also included, under the pumped outflow option.



In this case, the buffer volume in storage between pump start and stop



depths is computed and compared with the volume capable of being pump-






                                  146

-------
ed out per time-step.  If the buffer volume is too small, a message is


printed recommending remedial measures and warning that subsequent


computations are possibly unreliable.




Routing


With gravity outflows, the program requires that the basic routing


equation is satisfied, i.e., that




             0.5(1.,^ + I2)Dt = 0.5(0.,^ + 02)Dt + (S2 - S.^        (3)





where  I   =  Inflow rate (cfs)


       0   =  Outflow rate (cfs)


       S   =  Stored volume (cf)


       Dt  =  Hydrograph time-step size (sec)


and where subscript


        1 represents conditions existing at the start of Dt


        2 represents conditions existing at the end of  Dt


Rearranging to place the unknowns at time 2 on the left hand side  of


the equation,
         (0.5)0 Dt + S, » 0.5  (I. + I_)Dt - ((0.5)0 Dt - S )        (4)
               *•      ~         J.    Z             1      1
The quantity on the left hand side, given the FORTRAN name ATERM in


the program, may thus be evaluated for a new time-step.  Knowing the


storage and outlet characteristics of the reservoir  (discussed above),


the relation between ATERM and (0.5)0 Dt may be obtained.  This relation


is stored in the computer in the form of 11 pairs of routing parameters;


intermediate points are obtainable by simple linear  interpolation.




                                 147

-------
 Prom this selection the value of (0.5)C>2Dt corresponding to  the  known




 ATERM is  obtained;  the  required values  of  82   and  02   for  this




 reservoir and time  are  then easily found from  these known quantities.






 The  hydrograph is routed through the reservoir by  repeating  this pro-




 cedure for each time-step.






 The  initial conditions  within the reservoir must be specified.   For




 outlet controls such  as the weir,  with  the initial storage below the




 weir crest,  the program will simulate the  filling  period before  outflow




 begins.






 While  routing the flows,  the program accumulates the total volume of




 storage inflow and  outflow  during  the storm.   These volumes  are  after-




wards compared with the initial and final volumes in storage, to provide




a continuity check.






 Through-Flow




Having solved for the outflow rates  from the storage reservoir or tank,




 the nature of the flow  inside  the  unit  is  of concern insofar as  it




governs the movements,  detention times,  and thus the releases of the




 accompanying pollutants.






The types of  through-flow considered were:  complete mixing,  plug flow,




and short-circuiting.  Which,  if any, of these would actually occur is




a complex question,  probably  depending  upon the shape of the storage




unit, arrangement of the inlet and outlet(s),  the  flow rate, the pollu-




tants load, and other factors.
                                  148

-------
With the option of complete mixing, the inflow is thoroughly mixed with




the existing contents in storage, resulting in "averaged" qualities




the outflow.






With the plug flow option, the inflow during each time-step, here called




a plug, is labeled and queued through the storage volume.  Transfer of




pollutants between plugs is not permitted, but contributions of several




plus are averaged in the outflow time-step. The program identifies the




inflow plugs, or fractions thereof, which comprise each outflow plug; thus




the pollutant load and detention time for each outflow fraction is easily




found.






Short-circuiting could occur to considerably varied extents, depending




even more upon the above-mentioned factors of shape and load, etc.




For these reasons, the simulation of short-circuiting has not been in-




cluded in this model.






Neither sedimentation nor scour are simulated within the Storage Model.




The pollutant loads are only traced and redistributed as indicated




above.  With the external version of the  storage program, sedimentation




in storage is computed by the Treatment Model  (Section 15).






TEST APPLICATION




The Selby Street outfall in San Francisco, chosen  to test the use of




this model, serves a tributary area of some 3,800  acres.  An interceptor




normally carries dry weather flow  to a treatment plant.  The combined




sewer outfall was built as three rectangular compartments,  as shown  in




Figure 9-1.  During storms these compartments may  fill up and overflow




a 100-foot long weir into San Francisco Bay  (Ref.  2).





                                 149

-------

tfl
X
*
Ul
                 COMBINED  SEWER CONDUIT
                   2.8 OO FT
                                            VOLUME  IN  STORAGE
                                            BEFORE OVERFLOW
2^50 FT
                    543

                    DISTANCE  (THOUSANDS OF  FT)
                                                                       ASSUMED  WEIR
                                                                     ELEVATION,7.50FTX
                                                                                       30
                                                                                       20
                                                                                       I0_
                                                                     POINT OF OVERFLOW
                                                                     TO ISLAIS CREEK
                                                                    (INTERCEPTER CLOSED)
1350 FT
                                                                                       -10
                                                                                       -20
   Figure 9-1.   OUTFALL STORAGE, SELBY STREET,  SAN FRANCISCO

-------
The Storage Model as developed was used to calculate the effects of

this external outfall storage on the combined outflow hydrograph.


Because of the more complex shape of this storage unit,  the irregular

type of storage was specified.  The required data pairs of depth versus

surface area were taken from Figure 9-1 and are presented in Table 9-1.

More data points were taken above the weir crest (at 7,50-feet depth),

where more sensitivity is preferred.
                 Table 9-1. STORAGE MODEL INPUT DATA,
                            SEWER STORAGE BASIN, SELBY STREET,
                            SAN FRANCISCO
Data Pair
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Depth ,
ft
0.00
2.00
5.00
7.50
8.00
8.50
9.00
9.50
10.00
10.50
11.00
Surface Area,
sq ft
0
49,900
102,200
136,200
129,700
121,100
112,600
114,500
116,000
109,200
102,000
Due to the elongated shape of this storage unit, plug flow is probably

more appropriate than complete mixing for the simulation of pollutant

movements in this case.


The inflow hydrographs and pollutographs used were output from a

simulation with the Transport Model of the storm of November 6, 1966
                                 151

-------
 (Ref.  2)  in the contributing sewer system.   A 10-minute time-step was




 used.






 The hydrologic results of the test application are presented in




 Figure 9-2.   Hydrograph (1)  is the input to the Storage Model,  being




 the output from the Transport Model without storage.   Hydrograph (2)  is




 the output from the Storage  Model, i.e., the result of routing hydro-




 graph  (1)  through the sewer  storage basin.   Hydrograph (3)  is the




 reported hydrograph (Ref.  2), which must include the storage effect.






 Differences between hydrographs (2)  and (3), the total volume of flow




 under  the curves in particular, clearly result from assumptions made in




 the previous modeling and generation of hydrograph (1).  However, the




 effects  of storage  as  indicated by the  differences between  hydrographs




 (1)  and  (2)  are as  might be  expected.   In particular,  the delay in the




 start  of the rising limb while the reservoir was filling agrees well




with the reported time  that overflow started.







The continuity error was negligible, being less than one millionth of




the total inflow.






The quality results of the test application are given in two further




figures.  Variations with time of BOD and suspended solids concentrations




are presented in Figures 9-3 and 9-4 respectively.  The observed concen-




trations (Ref. 2) are compared in both figures with the output  from the




Storage Model using both the complete mixing and plug flow options




described earlier.  Results are also given for a third through-flow model
                                  152

-------
-
            9:00
Note:
                                                                             SELBY  ST., SAN FRANCISCO
                                                                             NOV. 6, 1966
                                                                             3,800  ACRES
                                 WITHOUT STORAGE
                                 35%  IMPERVIOUS
                                 TIME OF ENTRY = 10 WIN
                 lO'OO
:00
    12:00            13=00

CLOCK  TIME  (HR)
                                                                                           I4'00
                        and(3)refer to hydrograph numbers.

                         Figure  9-2.   HYDROGRAPH MODIFICATION PRODUCED BY OUTFALL STORAGE,

                                       SELBY  STREET, SAN FRANCISCO
                                                                                                           15:00

-------
400
                                                 SAN FRANCISCO-SELBY ST
                                                 COMBINED  SEWER
                                                 NOV. 6. 1966   STORM
SHORT- CIRCUITING
MODEL  (REJECTED)
                            PLUG FLOW MODEL
                                 COMPLETE  MIXING MODEL
                   11=00            I2'00

                          CLOCK    TIME  (HR)
                                      13:00
14^00
        Figure 9-3.   MODIFICATIONS TO BOD CONCENTRATION
                      PRODUCED BY OUTFALL  STORAGE,
                      SELBY STREET, SAN  FRANCISCO
                                154

-------
     1200
                                                SAN FRANCISCO-SELBY ST
                                                COMBINED SEWER
                                                NOV. 6,  1966
                    SHORT-CIRCUITING MODEL
                    (REJECTED)
                                                COMPLETE MIXING MODEL
                                                   PLUG  FLOW  MODEL
       10 = 00
                       11=00           12=00            13=00

                             CLOCK   TIME  (HR)
14:00
Figure 9-4.   MODIFICATIONS TO SUSPENDED SOLIDS CONCENTRATION  PRODUCED
              BY OUTFALL STORAGE,  SELBY STREET, SAN FRANCISCO
                                   155

-------
option, which was a version of short-circuiting based on APWA catchbasin




data (see the Surface Quality model).






Predicted suspended solids concentrations are seen to agree with the




observed data rather better than do the BOD concentrations.  However,




some of the differences may be attributed to the differences between




the observed and predicted hydrographs (Figure 9-2).  The short-circuiting




through-flow model was clearly less acceptable, particularly for suspended




solids modeling, and was therefore excluded from the Storage Model.
                                  156

-------
                               SECTION 10




                     RECEIVING WATER QUANTITY MODEL




                                                                   Page
OBJECTIVE                                                           159




RELATION TO STORM WATER PROGRAM                                     159




THE MODEL SUBROUTINE                                                160




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                             161




     Geometric Representation                                       162




     Solution Procedure                                             166




     Transient Hydrodynamics                                        169




     Alternate Boundary conditions                                  170




TEST APPLICATION                                                    170
                                    157

-------
                               SECTION 10




                     RECEIVING WATER QUANTITY MODEL







OBJECTIVE




The objective of the Receiving Water Quantity model is to provide the




hydraulic basis for the determination of the receiving water quality




responses resulting from storm water pollution.   The receiving water




body may be an estuary, a stream, or a lake.  The model simulates the




movement of water for each type of water system.







The receiving water bodies may have different geometric configurations




with various boundary conditions.  To be of wide applicability, the




model must use a system that can readily be  adapted to any prototype




condition by simply changing the input data.






For this purpose, the model represents the water body by a network of




nodal points connected by channels.  The nodal points and channels are




idealized hydraulic elements which are characterized by parameters, such




as surface area, cross-sectional area, length, and friction coefficient.




Equations of motion and continuity can thus be applied to each element




and solved simultaneously to produce a time-history of stage, velocity,




and flow at the various points of the water system.






RELATION TO STORM WATER PROGRAM




The receiving water body is the end point where the pollutional effects




of storm water are to be evaluated.  At this point, the runoff hydrograph




at each outfall and associated pollutographs for various chemical
                                   159

-------
constituents have already been computed by a sequential operation of the




Runoff, Transport/ and Storage Blocks of the Storm Water Management




Model.






The nodal point of the receiving water system adjacent to an outfall will




accept a runoff hydrograph input.  The confuted stage and flow conditions




of the receiving water are then passed on to the Receiving Water Quality




model for quality routing.  The transfer of information between the




programs is normally handled by interfacing storage devices such as mag-




netic tape written in compatible format.






THE MODEL SUBROUTINE




Liaison between the Storm Water Management Model and the Receiving Water




Quantity model is provided by subroutine RECEIV which accepts the hydro-




graph and pollutograph at the outfalls from the Transport Model.  The




model consists of six major subroutines, i.e., SWFLOW, INDATA, TIDCF,




TRIAN, PRTOUT, and OUTPUT.  Hydrograph information is used in the




hydraulic computation and pollutograph information is passed on to the




Receiving Water Quality model discussed in Section 14.






RECEIV calls SWFLOW which then takes over the control to perform hydro-




dynamic computations with the assistance of other subroutines*  For




example, INDATA is called to read input data pertaining to geometric




information of channels and junctions and control parameters specifying




the days of simulation, time interval of computation, and so forth.  If




the water body is a lake, coefficients for the weir formula at the down-




stream outlet will be  read by SWFLOW.  Otherwise, SWFLOW will call
                                   160

-------
TIDCF to determine the tidal coefficients describing the boundary con-




straint at the mouth of the estuary.






On the basis of the data received through INDATA, TRIAN uses the laws of




trigonometry to interpolate geometric information for hydraulic elements




of the water systems which otherwise would have to be deduced from a map




manually.






Upon completion, SWFLOW calls PRTOUT to print hydraulic stage and flow




behavior at selected points in the water system.  It also calls OUTPUT




to prepare computational results for graphical display by a printer plot




routine.  SWFLOW itself then writes detailed hydrodynamic information for




subsequent use by the Receiving Water Quality model.






THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT




The hydrodynamic behavior of a water body influenced by external forces




is governed by two fundamental equations, i.e., the equation of motion




and the equation of continuity.  A complete description of the movement




of water requires a simultaneous solution of the two equations.






While the differential equations of motion and continuity have been des-




cribed for various coordinate systems since the eighteenth century, the




solutions have been developed only for limited cases with simple boundary




conditions.  For example, the flow problems and their analytical solution




for the one-dimensional channel have been studied quite extensively for




constant boundary conditions, such as a steady inflow and/or a downstream




head control.  When the inflow is variable, the problems become too




complicated to be solved by conventional analytical methods.  The degree






                                   161

-------
 of difficulty compounds  further as the  water body becomes  so. big  that




 flow can occur in a  two-dimensional plan or  in  a three-dimensional volume.




 Yet,  these  are the kinds of problems  that  need  to be  solved  in the




 Storm Water Management Model.






 Recently, these complex  hydrodynamic  problems have been approached by




 numerical methods assisted by  advanced  computer technology.  One  such




 approach, developed  by WRE, has attempted  to develop  an iterative solution




 technique for the hydrodynamic equations to  be  performed by  a computer.






 While  this  hydrodynamic  model  has  proven to  be  very versatile in  dealing




 with various geometric and boundary conditions, it has never been used




 to  accept a hydrograph input.   The modification of the model to treat




 the transient hydrodynamic behavior and the  associated problems caused




 by  storm water inflow was considered  the next logical step in its




 development.






 Geometric Representation




 The computer model requires a  nodal point and grid system for the repre-




 sentation of the prototype receiving water body.  For a simple stream,




 one can  conceptually represent the  body of water by sectioning the river




 into reaches.  A reach is defined  as a  channel where water flows  from




 one end to  the other.  The end of  the reach  is further defined as a




 junction where two reaches meet.






 If the head at the junction at any  given time is known, the hydraulic




gradient along the channel and thus the flow rate may be calculated.
                                   162

-------
 By  transferring water  from one end to the other according to the com-




 puted  flow,  the head at  the  junction will subsequently be altered.




 Therefore, a stepwise  hydraulic computation can be performed on a dis-




 cretized system representing the water body.






 To  facilitate  the hydraulic  computation,  it is necessary to supply  the




 surface  width, length, average depth, and friction coefficient  for  the




 channels and the  surface area, head, and  floor elevation for the junctions,




 The junction surface area is defined as one-half_of_thje_surface areas of




.the preceding  and succeeding reaches; the floor elevation is defined as




 the depth of the  bottom  ground surfa^ce^,froBL.a given ^datum plane such as




 mean low low water.  All of  these geometric parameters are readily




 measurable from a navigation map.  It must be noted  that the floor




 elevations are referenced to the same datum for all  junctions.






 For a  lake or  estuary, the water body may not be  represented reasonably




 well by  a single  channel.  In this case,  the channel and junction system




 is  used  to form a grid covering the water body.   Several channels can now




 meet at  a junction, enabling the depiction of two-dimensional flow




 characteristics in a horizontal plan.  Since the  channel is the hydraulic




 element  where water flows^the layout of  the principal channel  must con-




 form with the direction  of current as closely as  possible^  Figure  10-1




 shows  the geometric representation of a receiving water  with some of the




 possible hydrologic inputs.






 The  shape of the  grid  system is flexible  in that_it  can  bei orthogonal,




 triangular,  or irregular.  If the condition warrants, the use of a
                                  163

-------
                                                     LEGEND
                                       Outfalls
                                             Node 13
                                             Node 14
                                       Rivers
                                             Node 10
                                             Node 16
                                             Node 18
                                        [Sj Node  (typical)

                                            Channel  (typical)


                                       Scale:   1  in. = 10,000 ft
DWF (cfs)

   20
     .
   50
  500
2,000
                                                                 TYPICAL INPUT
                                                                 HYOROGRAPH
Figure 10-1.   GEOMETRIC REPRESENTATION OF  A RECEIVING WATER
                                164

-------
triangular shape is recommended.  Many of the data for a triangular
system can be deduced from the laws of trigonometry and thus the data
preparation is greatly simplified.

The channel width in a grid system is not as well defined as that for a

simple stream.  The present,
the distance between two lines parallei to thechannelimdpassi
the centroids of two triangles sharing the channel^  if it is not a
triangular grid, the centroid of whatever shape is used will still be
used foj^jmas^ring tihe^channel width.

The length of the channel is governed by a stability criterion of the
numerical integration technique.  This criterion was described by
Garrison et al. as follows (Ref. 1) :

                            A±  <  i      gn2 |v|     At               (1)
                            Ax  ~        2.21 R4/3

where  V   =  Mean velocity
       A   =  Cross-sectional area
       B   =  Surface width
       g   =  Gravitational acceleration
       n   =  Manning's resistance coefficient
       R   =  Hydraulic radius
       At  =  Time  interval
       Ax  =  Channel length
                                   165

-------
 For channels, A/B is equal  to depth h.  The relationship can then be



 simplified to
                                 At < a Ax                              (2)
 where  a    =  Proportionality constant



       "\/gh  =  Celerity  of wave





 Since the computational  time interval is normally  constant throughout



 the system, the deeper channel should have a longer length according to



 the expression.  A channel length longer than necessary favors the
                               —   ---------------- —     '
 stability, but it reduces  the accuracy of hydraulic and quality compu-
 ^——~m*^f*——           ___________ __-,>-SVS*S£l«


 a- value ranging^from 0.7 to 0.8.
\^jglggfjfjpjjQ£lftfjyjfjfjjtUiitli6tituHHlii^





 Solution Procedure




 Basically, the hydraulic computations for each time interval proceeds as




 follows :




      1.  Compute the flow  rate in each channel according to the




          hydraulic gradient and other hydraulic conditions existing



          at the beginning  of a time interval.




      2.  Compute the rise  or fall of the water surface (head)  at




          each junction based on the channel flow  and the importation




          or withdrawal of  water at the junction.




      3.  Update the geometric and hydraulic conditions for the




          computation of the next time interval.
                                     166

-------
Thus, the iterative procedure uses the equation of motion to calculate



the channel flow and then uses the equation of continuity to determine



the junction head.  Since the computations proceed step-by-step, the




boundary conditions, such as the tide and the hydrologic input, can be



varied from one time interval to the next.





Mathematically, the equation of motion for a one-dimensional. channel



can be written as  follows:

where  V   =  Velocity




       t   =  Time




       x   =  Distance




       H   =  Water surface elevation measured  from  the datum plane




       g   =  Gravitational acceleration




       S_  =  Energy gradient




       S   -  Wind stress
        w





The energy gradient  S   of turbulent flow is proportioned to the square




of the mean velocity according  to Manning's equation,
                              sf—:
                                   2.2



where  n  =  Friction  coefficient



       R  =  Hydraulic radius of the  channel





The wind stress  can be approximated by  the  following expression:




                               K     oa   2      ,
                             = —  • -J-—  u cos  ty







                                    167

-------
where  K   =  Dimensionless coefficient with a value of 0.0026 (Refs. 2,3)
       d   =  Depth of flow
       pa  =  Air density    \-Jk*tjj4 SJUv^
       pw  =  Water density
       U   =  Wind velocity
       4»   =  Angle between the wind direction and the axis of the channel

The second equation necessary to complete the mathematical formulation
of the problem is furnished by the continuity requirement at the junctions.
This requirement states that the net effect of water flowing into the
junction through channels or importation is to raise the water surface
elevation at the junction, i.e.,
                             3H.    k
                         As J iJ - .f x Qi + Bj                        (6)
where  A .  =  Surface area associated with the junction j
       Q.   =  Flow of a connecting channel
       Q .   =  Water importation rate to the junction

The equation still applies for cases where the water surface elevation
is lowered resulting from outflow.

Numerical solution of Eqs. 3 and 6 entails a rewriting of both equations
in finite difference form.  The initial value of various parameters at
time  t   is used to determine the rate changes of flow and water head
during a short period of time (integration interval At) .  Based on the
rate change, the next value is computed and the whole procedure is
repeated.
                                   168

-------
Various numerical methods have been developed to solve this type of




initial value problem.  The present model uses a modified Runge-Kutta




technique where the interval of integration is divided into four.  The



intermediate time-step computations improve the stability and accuracy




of the model.






Transient Hydrodynamics




As stated previously, the model requires initial values at time  t  to




compute values of the next time interval,  t + At.  With the detailed




finite element representation of the receiving water body, however, there




is difficulty in obtaining the starting conditions for each channel and




junction.






This difficulty was resolved by starting the program from a standstill




condition with the mean tide elevation at each junction as the initial




head.  The specifiable boundary conditions, such as the tide or  head




relationship at the governing downstream point, are then imposed on the




model to proceed with the computation.  In the first two days of compu-




tation, the system is in a transient state toward a dynamic steady state




in which the stage and current throughout the system are synchronized




to the given tidal condition.






The program, equipped with all necessary hydraulic information to start




the actual simulation, will then accept the storm water inflow for the




calculation of hydrodynamic responses in the receiving water.  The




system will again be in the transient state until the storm is ended and




its residual effect diminished.
                                   169

-------
Alternate Boundary Conditions




The distinction between estuaries and streams or lakes in the present




model is strictly a problem of downstream boundary conditions.  In




estuaries, the boundary condition is usually a specified tide at the




mouth, such as the Golden Gate of San-Francisco Bay.  A lake is constrained




by a head-flow relationship,  (i.e., weir equation) of the outlet.




Rivers can be a special case of either estuaries or lakes depending again




on the downstream condition, i.e., a constant head or a stage-flow




relationship of the channel.






For the lake, thermal stratification may occur at certain times of the




year, influencing the hydraulic response.  Prediction of thermal behav-




ior in conjunction with the storm water inflow is beyond the scope of




this study.  However, the location of a  thermocline can  be  expected  to be




known for a particular simulation through field measurement.  For storm




water purposes, one can then neglect the presence of water below the




thermocline  in  estimating depths  for  the  hydraulic  computation.







TEST APPLICATION
Actual data were not available for testing the hydrodynamic  response  of




the receiving water under the storm water effect.  Present model testing




is therefore based on the engineering evaluation of the reasonableness




of the answers.  The general method of procedure, however, has been




proven valid, for several prototype conditions accepting the constant




inflow (Refs. 4,5,6).
                                  170

-------
Several tests were made using the geometric system of Figure 10-1.   As




shown, each channel was 10,000 feet long,  with a depth ranging from 15




feet at channel 28 to 20 feet throughout the open water body.






Figure 10-2 shows the input hydrographs applied to the system.  Not




shown in the figure are the hydrograph inflows to junctions 13 and 10




which are identical in shape and time to those of junctions 14 and 16,




respectively, except that the flow coordinate is ten times smaller.




These input hydrographs are superimposed on the dry weather flow of




2,000 cfs at junction 18, 500 cfs at junction 16, 50 cfs at junctions




10 and 14, and 20 cfs at junction 13.






For the test of an estuary case, a tidal wave was imposed on  junction 1.




A typical dynamic response of flow in channel 24 is plotted in Figure




10-2.  The transient effect of storm water inflow is noted  to push the




flow pattern toward outflow  (seaward) direction.  The  case  shown herein




is a shallow estuary with a strong tide at the mouth.   Tidal  influence,




therefore, dominates the system behavior  and yet  the  transient hydro-




dynamic effect caused by storm water inflow  is discernible  after the




fifth day of simulation.






This  response appears reasonable  as do  others when the system is con-




sidered a lake and a stage-flow relationship  is  specified for junction




1.  Verification runs for the Receiving Water Model were  made at three




demonstration sites and are described in  Volume  II  of the final report.
                                   171

-------
        3  r
a
o
o
U_
u_
o
        2  -
I   -
                                                            INPUT  HYDROGRAPHS
o
o
Q.
o

LL.
       20
                                                                          CHANNEL  24

                                                                            FLOW
                      i                       3           4          ~5
                                      TIDAL  CYCLES  (DAY)


            Figure 10-2.  TEST SYSTEM FLOWS  SHOWING HYDROGPAPH EFFECTS
                                                            ff""WITHOUT  HYOROGRAPH
                                                            It    INPUT




                                                           /  WITH  HYDROCRAPH
                                                                INPUT

-------
       PART 3




QUALITY SUBROUTINES

-------
                              SECTION 11




                    SURFACE RUNOFF QUALITY MODEL




                                                                  Page




OBJECTIVES                                                         175




BACKGROUND                                                         175




IDENTIFICATION OF POLLUTANTS                                       175




THE MODEL SUBROUTINE                                               176




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                            177




     Initial Theory                                                177




     The Cincinnati Study                                          179




     Estimation of Pollutants on the Ground, P                     180




     Tests Indicate Modifications Necessary                        184




     Availability Factor, A                                        184




     BOD Modification                                              191




     BOD From Catchbasins                                          192




     Displacement and First Flush Effects                          194




     Coliforms in Surface Runoff                                   194




TEST APPLICATION                                 .                  195
                                   173

-------
                              SECTION 11




                     SURFACE RUNOFF QUALITY MODEL






OBJECTIVES




The objectives of the Surface Runoff Quality model are to:




     1.  Identify the quality constituents or pollutants.




     2.  Determine the quantities of pollutants on each subcatchment




         prior to the storm event.




     3.  Determine the rate of removal of pollutants during a storm




         event.






BACKGROUND




The literature contains many studies on the determination of the volume




of surface runoff from both natural watersheds and urban sewered areas,




and some notable compilations of the quality of overflows from combined




sewers and the discharge of separate storm drains.  These studies have




amply demonstrated that storm water overflows contribute significantly




to the overall water pollution problem and should be investigated.  Only




a very few studies, however, have included data on both runoff quantity




and quality in sufficient detail so that the quality of direct surface




runoff could be computed as a function of the runoff intensity.  Con-




sequently, in the development of the Surface Runoff Quality model it




was necessary to rely on a theoretical approach, with the values of the




coefficients determined by and checked against the available data.  The




development and preliminary verification of the theory is described in




this section.
                                   175

-------
 IDENTIFICATION OF POLLUTANTS




 Many different determinations are made in the analysis of wastewater to




 determine its pollution load.  Pollutants may be classified as con-




 servative or nonconservative.  Examples of conservative pollutants are:




 total and volatile suspended solids, ammonia and organic nitrogen,




 phosphate, and oil and grease.  Examples of nonconservative pollutants




 are BOD, COD, and coliform content.  The modeling of the surface runoff




 quality from a drainage area assumes that all pollutants are conservative




 because of the short transport times involved.  Pollutants may also be




 classified as soluble or nonsoluble.  The modeling method will handle




 any pollutant for which data are available.  To date, the data have




 permitted the modeling of BOD, suspended solids, and coliforms.






 THE MODEL SUBROUTINE




 The model (subroutine SFQUAL)  accepts as input the hydrograph of surface




 runoff developed for the subarea and produces three pollutographs, one




 of BOD and one of suspended solids, both in pounds of pollutants per




 time-step, and the other of coliforms in MPN per time-step.  At the head




 end of the system, the hydrograph of surface runoff and the three




pollutographs are delivered to the Transport Block which combines the




hydrograph with the volumes of infiltration and dry weather flow, and the




three pollutographs with the BOD, suspended solids, and coliforms con-




tributed by the dry weather flow.  The pollution contribution of the




infiltration is assumed to be zero.  The Transport Block routes the




resultant hydrograph and three pollutographs down the sewer to the next




inlet point,  taking account of the volume of wastewater and pounds of
                                   176

-------
pollutants—or in the case of coliforms, MPN—in the sewer at the start




of the rain, as well as the changing volume of wastewater and the amount




of pollutants stored in the sewer during each time-step.  At the next




inlet point, the contributions from the next subarea are added to the




hydrograph and three pollutographs modified by passage through the




Transport Block.  Then, the combined hydrograph and three pollutographs




are routed down the next stretch of sewer by the Transport Block.




This process is continued at successive inlet points.  A multi-branched




sewer system is assumed.






The process is facilitated by initially expressing the pollutants in




pounds or MPN per time-step.  To obtain the concentration in mg/L or




MPN/100 ml, it is only necessary to divide the total pounds in any time-




step by the total volume of flow during the same time-sttjp using the




correct conversion factor.  Both the pollutograph  (which gives the pounds




or MPN) and the hydrograph  (which gives the volume of flow) must be for




the same point in the sewer system.  At the end of the  subroutine SFQUAL,




the pollutants are converted to Ib/min or MPN/min for coliforms before




being transferred to the Transport Block via output file.






THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT




Initial Theory




At the start of the rain, the amount of a particular pollutant on surfaces




which produce runoff (both impervious and pervious) will be  P   , pounds




per subarea.  Assuming that the pounds of pollutant washed off in any




time interval,  dt , are proportional to the pounds remaining on the
                                   177

-------
ground,  P , the first order differential equation is:
which integrates to





                         P  - P  =  P  (l-e~kt)                        (2)
                          o          o




in which  P  - P  equals the pounds washed away in the time,  t .
           o




In order to determine  k , it was assumed that  k  would vary in direct



proportion to the rate of runoff,  r , or  k = br .  To determine  b  it



was assumed that a uniform runoff of 1/2 inch per hour would wash away



90 percent of the pollutant in one hour.  This leads to the equation:





                        P  - P  =  P (l-e"4'6rt)                      (3)
                         o          o




where  r  =  Runoff rate (in./hr)



       t  =  Time interval (hr)



(Other assumptions for determining  b  could be made but this original



assumption has proven satisfactory in all test applications to date for



urban areas.)





In using this equation, a uniform time-step  t  is selected; values of



r  are determined from the inlet hydrograph; and the equation is applied



successively, the value of  P  determined at the end of the  nth  interval



becoming the value of  P   at the beginning of the   (n+l)th  interval.



The value of  r = 0.5(r +r   ).                                       (4)
                       n  n+1
                                  178

-------
 The concentration in each interval  may  be  determined by  dividing   P  - P




 by the runoff in cfs and multiplying  by a  constant  which depends on  the




 time interval.   This constant equals  268 divided by the  time  interval




 in minutes.   Since  r  in inches per  hour  - cfs  per acre,  the runoff in




 cfs = r  times area in acres.  The  concentration may be  expressed  in the




 form of an equation as follows:




                                               (P - P) in  Ib
                .,   	268          	  o     	  ...

    Cone, in mg/L = time_step in min  *   r  in in./hr x  area in acres   (5)







    Note: in./hr times acres is equal  to runoff in cfs.






 Catchbasins as a source of pollution  are considered later  in  this  section.






 The Cincinnati Study




 A paper (Ref. 1) describing the results of a study  by  the  U.S. Public




 Health Service (USPHS) of a 27-acre area in Cincinnati served by separate




 sewers contains data which were used as a  preliminary  check on the fore-




 going theory.  The preliminary trial  runs  indicated that the theory would




 produce figures of the right order of magnitude for a storm similar to




'the first 4 hours of the reported storm of March 16,  1963, if appropriate




 values of  P   were assumed.  Further,  the concentration of suspended




 solids and BOD were shown, as in Table IV of the paper,  to decrease with




 the length of the storm, although not as rapidly.   Since Table IV gives




 mean values which would not apply precisely to a particular storm, the




 agreement with the general trend was  considered a satisfactory check.




 The comparative figures are not reproduced herein because  refinements




 in the estimation of the values of  P   and in the application of the




 method to suspended solids make the original figures  of historical interest






                                    179

-------
only.  The Cincinnati paper proved invaluable in the further development

of the method as described hereinafter.


Estimation of Pollutants on the Ground, P
                                         o

The Cincinnati study gives estimates of the pounds of pollutants in the

storm water runoff "based on essentially complete measurement of rainfall

and consequent runoff and quality at the study site during September

through November 1962, and March through September 1963, projected to

average annual rainfall at Cincinnati" as shown in Table 11-1.
           Table 11-1.  ESTIMATED ANNUAL RUNOFF OF POLLUTANTS
                        FROM CINCINNATI AREA
Constituent
SS
vss
COD
BOD
PC-
4
Total N
Lb/acre/yr
730
160
240
33
2.5

8.9
           Source:  S. R. Weibel et al., "Urban Land Runoff as
                    a Factor in Stream Pollution," July 1964
                    (Ref. 1, excerpt from Table V).
Dividing the figures in Table 11-1 by 365 provides average figures for

the proportion of the daily accumulation that appears in the surface

runoff.  These may be considered reasonable averages for urban conditions

in the Midwest and East, i.e., for urban areas having similar annual

weather and rainfall patterns.  They do not, however, provide the amount

of pollutants on the ground at the start of a rain as affected by ante-

cedent conditions, street cleaning practices, and neighborhood character-

istics.
                                   180

-------
These necessary data were found in the American Public Works Association

(APWA)  study (Ref. 2)  and are incorporated in the model.  The study gives

the daily accumulation of dust and dirt, D/D, per 100 feet of curb and

its soluble BOD content for various types of neighborhoods in Chicago.

These are reproduced in Table 11-2.  In this section and in the model

terminology the terms curb and gutter are used interchangeably.
             Table 11-2.  DAILY DUST AND DIRT ACCUMULATION
                          IN CHICAGO AREA
Dust and Dirt, D/D, BOD of D/D,
Land Use lb/day/100 ft of curb mg/gram
Single family
Multiple family
Commercial
Industrial
Average of above,
weighted
0.7
2.3
3.3
4.6
1.5
5.0
3.6
7.7
3.0
5.0
        Source:  APWA, "Water Pollution Aspects of  Urban  Runoff,"
                 January 1969, WP-20-15  (Ref.  2, p.  56).
The figures in Table  11-2 represent  the  accumulation on the  streets and

in the gutters of the dust and dirt  fraction  of  the  litter deposted in

18 test areas in Chicago and were  incorporated into  the model  with the

average accumulation  of D/D and BOD  used for  parks directly  and undeveloped

land.


In using  these data it is first necessary to  estimate the  number of feet

of gutter per acre.   This is best  done  from a map, but if  none is
                                    181

-------
available, a reasonable estimate may be made based on the size of the




blocks.  For example, blocks 330 feet square, or 220 feet by 500 feet,




would have approximately 465 feet of gutter per acre.  Although this




size is small for Chicago, it may be a fairly good average, except where




lot sizes are larger than 1/4 acre and blocks are unusually long.






The amount of this material on the ground at the start of the rain will




depend on the frequency and efficiency of street sweeping methods as well




as on the number of dry days since the last rain.  At present the




following procedures are being used to allow for these effects: if the




number of dry days since the last rain is less than or equal to the




frequency of cleaning, the D/D accumulation per day from the table is




multiplied by the number of dry days to find the accumulation on the




ground at the start of the rain.  This procedure would appear to err on




the high side, since it tacitly assumes that the streets are not swept in




the interval, but it is probably on the low side during weeks when it




rains every day or every other day, since the APWA study found very little




effect on the accumulation of D/D due to rainfall between street cleanings




(Ref. 2, p. 42).  For a series of computer runs covering several months'




or a year's rainfall the high and low estimates will probably average out.




In attempting to check the results in a particular storm preceded by




only one or two dry days it may be necessary to determine, if possible,




when the streets were cleaned, or to assume a minimum number of days'




accumulations, or to make allowance for the D/D not washed off by the




preceding rains.  A case in point is the storm of November 15, 1967,




on the Laguna Street area in San Francisco (Ref. 3), which will be




discussed later in this section.




                                   182

-------
If the number of dry days since the last rain exceeds the cleaning

frequency, the equivalent number of days of accumulation is computed

by the following formulas:
                           NCLEAN  =  DRDA¥
                                      CLFREQ
                                                                     (6)

    TOTDD  =  CLFREQ x DD x [l + (1 - REFF) + ... + (1 - BEFF)NCLEAN]



where  DRDAY   =  Number of dry days before storm event

       CLFREQ  =  Number of days between street cleanings

       TOTDD   =  Pounds of dust and dirt on the ground before the

                  start of storm

       DD      =  Dust and dirt accumulation rate per subarea

       REFF    =  Efficiency of street cleanings (see Table 11-3)


For example, in the case of the March 10, 1967, storm on the Laguna

Street area in San Francisco, the number of dry days preceding the storm

was 40, the cleaning frequency was 7 days, and the efficiency of cleaning

was assumed to be 75 percent, resulting in an equivalent accumulation of

9.33 days.


The cleaning efficiency, REFF, is assumed to depend on both the number

of passes of the sweeper and the frequency of cleaning in accordance with

Table 11-3, which is based on a table in the APWA study and has been

incorporated in the model.
                                   183

-------
               Table 11-3.  EFFICIENCY OF STREET SWEEPING

                            IN CHICAGO AREA
Cleaning
Frequency
15 days or more
8 to 15 days
7 days or less
Efficiency
1 Pass
.60
.70
.75
as a Decimal
2 Passes
.88
.92
.95
Fraction
3 Passes
.98
.98
.98
          Source:  APWA, "Water Pollution Aspects of Urban Runoff,"

                   January 1969, WP-20-15  (Ref. 2, p. 147).
Tests Indicate Mbdifications Necessary


When  P   was estimated directly from the APWA results and applied to the
       o

Cincinnati area without modification of the theory, it became evident



immediately that the suspended solids were 5 to 10 times too high and



the BOD was much less than reported.  Preliminary trials using San



Francisco data from Ref. 3 gave similar results.




This was temporarily disconcerting but eventually beneficial because it



led to a more detailed study and deeper understanding 6f the APWA report.


The effort resulted in modifications of the theory which have been



checked satisfactorily against data available for the Laguna Street


combined sewer in San Francisco (Ref. 3).  In arriving at the necessary



modifications, data in the Cincinnati study were used to great advantage.




Availability Factor, A


Attention was directed primarily to suspended solids because of the very


large differences encountered, and the conclusion was reached that not



all the dust and dirt was normally available for the production of sus-



pended solids.



                                  184

-------
That portion of the street litter passing a 1/8-inch hardware cloth was




defined as the dust and dirt portion in the APWA study.  Sieve analyses




were made of dust and dirt removed by hand sweeping and by various




machine methods and are reported in Appendix E of Ref. 2.  Screen sizes




were 10, 16, 20, and 30-mesh, so all that was measured was the grit




component.  The amount passing the 30-mesh sieve varied from 0.62 percent




to 13.6 percent in 4 samples (one additional sample gave 42.06 percent)




removed by machine sweeping; from 58.8 percent to 82.5 percent in 4 samples




removed by hand sweeping; and from 65.48 percent to 93.18 percent in 4




samples removed by vacuum cleaning following machine sweeping.






Assuming a 70 percent efficiency for machine sweeping, it can be inferred




from these data that approximately one-quarter to three-quarters of the




dust and dirt is finer than  30-mesh, and that machine  sweepers remove




about 85 percent of the coarser material but a very much smaller proportion




of the finer material.  It is the finer material that  contributes  to the




suspended solids load.  The  coarser material, if it gets into the  sewers,




constitutes grit, and, while its removal is essential  in sewage treatment




plants, it amounts to less than 2.5 percent of the  suspended solids




 (Ref. 2, p. Ill).  These  facts, plus the fact that  the occurrence  of




rainfall between cleanings had little  effect on  the amount  of dust and




dirt removed  (Ref. 2, p.  42), confirm  the  foregoing conclusion that only




a portion of the dust and dirt is normally available  for the production




of suspended solids.






There is considerable information on dust  fallout  in  the APWA study.




Dust fallout on the Cincinnati area was  also reported.  It  is stated






                                   185

-------
 (Ref. 2, p. 105) that dustfall particulates vary in size from 1 to over




100 microns, but from another statement  (p. 23) it can be concluded that




the bulk of dustfall particulates range in size from 20 to 40 microns




 (.02 to .04 mm).  Note that a 400-mesh screen has an opening size of




37 microns, and that 100 microns lies between 100- and 200-mesh.  Grit




chambers are usually designed to remove material coarser than 65-mesh,




and in extreme cases coarser than 100-mesh.  Dustfall that is washed




into the sewers appears as suspended solids.






The following significant figures on dust fallout are contained in the




APWA study (Ref. 2, pp. 23-25):






                     Yearly Average   Tons/sq mi/nro




                        1954-65           54.9




                          1965            41.0




                          1966            36.9






The range in measurements at 20 stations in Chicago in 1966 was from




20.6 to 61.4 tons/sq mi/ino.  The dustfall on the Cincinnati area was




reported as 506 Ib/acre/yr, which is equivalent to 13.5 tons/sq mi/mo,




or less than the lowest Chicago reading.  Figure 2 (Ref. 2, p. 25) shows




the dustfall on a 10-acre unit area varying throughout the year from




0.30 ton/mo to 0.79 ton/mo.  The average of the seven summer months is




0.50 ton/mo or 3.3 Ib/acre/day compared with a yearly average of 0.58




ton/mo.  The corresponding figures at the minimum and maximum Chicago




stations are 1.84 and 5.5 Ib/acre/day.  The Cincinnati figure, unadjusted




for monthly variations, equals 1.38 Ib/acre/day.
                                   186

-------
The weighted average D/D from Table 11-2,  assuming 364 feet of curb per




acre based on normal Chicago residential blocks 330 feet by 660 feet with




no curb allowance for alleys, equals 1.5 x 3.64 or 5.46 Ib/acre/day.  The




average summer dustfall of 3.30 Ib/acre/day amounts to 60 percent of this




figure.  However, since the average imperviousness of the typical 10-acre




unit area is 36 percent, of which 46 percent is roof area and 54 percent




streets and alleys, the amount of dustfall in the D/D samples is 60 x




.36 x  .54 or 11.7 percent.  It would be somewhat more if the wind blows




dust off the roofs and trees into the street.  An additional 10 percent




settles on roof areas originally and may remain there until flushed off




by rain or blown onto streets or grassed areas.






A theoretical study of overland flow from pavements combined with




Shields' equation for sediment transport  (Ref. 4) indicates that the




closer a particle is to the gutter, the smaller the runoff rate necessary




to transport it there, and the larger the particle, the greater the runoff




rate required.  This study indicated that a rainfall  rate of  .14 inch




per hour would begin to move 20-micron material,  and  a rate of .65 inch




per hour would begin to move 40-micron material.  The action  of  traffic




has a  tendency to concentrate the dirt and dust as well as  the street




litter in or close to the gutter.   Once in the gutter the  finer material




is readily transported.  Using the  equations  for  flow in gutters  in Tholin




and Kiefer's paper  (Ref. 5), it was found that a  runoff rate  of .01 inch




per hour would transport 20-micron  material,  and  a rate of .03 inch per




hour would transport 40-micron material.  The overland  flow equations




indicate that very large rates of runoff  would be required to remove
                                  187

-------
dust and dirt from grass plots, and that unless erosion takes place from



ungrassed areas, the contribution of pervious surfaces to suspended



solids content is minor.  However, the runoff from pervious surfaces



may contain significant amounts of soluble pollutants.





The above analysis indicates that at the beginning of a rain a small



proportion of the dust and dirt is immediately available, and that as



the rain increases, more and more dust and dirt, represented by larger



particles and particles farther from the water channels, becomes available.





Figure 9 of Ref . 1 shows the suspended solids concentration plotted



against the mean flow of increasing flow ranges to fall on a straight



line which can be represented by the following equation:
                 j3s  a-e-4-6 rt>
                                  188

-------
Using a time-step of 10 minutes, or  t = 1/6 hr ,  values of suspended




solids were determined by both equations for each of the plotted points




of Figure 9 in Ref. 1 and equated to determine values of  AP  .   A figure




of 2,510 pounds was estimated for  P  , equivalent to 93 pounds  per acre,




based on the figures in Table 11-2, assuming the land use to be  50 percent




commercial and 50 percent single-family residential, 465 feet of curb per




acre, and 10 antecedent dry days without street sweeping in the  interim,




i.e., 10 days accumulation of dust and dirt.






Using this value of  P   allowed the computation of values of  A  which




were plotted against  r .  The following equation of several tested




fitted the data best and was adopted initially:






                         A  =  .057 + 1.4 r1'1                       (10)






The maximum computed value of  A  was .44 for  r =  .31  .  Based on the




foregoing qualitative discussion of the amount and availability of the




finer portions of the D/D, a maximum value of  .75 is suggested for  A




except where soil erosion is a factor, and is incorporated in the model.






The equation was first applied to the Cincinnati area for the storm of




March 16, 1963, using  P  = 2,510 pounds.  In the first application of the




availability factor, a new value of  A  for each time increment was multi-




plied by 2,510 pounds, and the sum of the suspended solids removed in all




previous time increments was deducted from this product to obtain the




amount available at the beginning of each time-step.  The concentration




of suspended solids in each time-step, as well as the plain and weighted




averages, were plotted against the runoff in cfs.  Only the initial points
                                   189

-------
of low runoff lay on the curve of Figure 9 in Ref. 1, and both averages



lay below it, indicating that the available solids were decreasing too



rapidly as the computation proceeded.






A second computation was made in which the pounds removed in each time



increment were deducted from D/D on the ground at the beginning of the



time increment before multiplying by  A , to obtain a new amount available,



or REMDD, the D/D remaining on the ground.  The computed results were



much closer to the curve of Figure 9 in Ref. 1, and the plain and weighted



averages straddled the curve.  This method of computation was therefore



adopted for further testing and is incorporated in the model.






A third method of computation similar to the first method was tried using



a revised equation for  A  which was modified so as to make the computed



points fit the curve of Figure 9 in Ref. 1 better, but instead of



deducting  iDD/dt from  A  times initial  P  , the amount removed up to



the beginning of the time-step was recomputed as 2  DD/dt, or what it



would have been if the runoff had not exceeded the runoff in the time-step



being computed.   This procedure was based on the assumption that each



increase in  r  and  A  involved larger or more remote particles tnat



became available progressively as  r  increased, but that any portion



available incrementally and removed for values of  r  in previous time-



steps greater than  r  in the time-step under consideration, should not



be deducted from  A  times initial  P   since it is not contained in
                                     o


the new value of  A .  This procedure appeals theoretically, but the



results were not significantly different from those of the second method



and the computation procedure was a great deal more complicated.  There-



fore this method was not adopted.




                                  190

-------
All three methods of computation produced suspended solids concentrations




of approximately the right order of magnitude,  but none of them exhibited




the pattern of decreasing concentration with length of storms as shown




in Table IV of the Cincinnati study (Ref. 1).  Since this table gives




average results for a wide variety of storms, lack of agreement for a




particular storm is not especially significant.






BOD Modification




In tests of the method using the storm of March 16, 1963, on the Cincinnati




area, the amount of BOD removed was approximately half of the annual




average BOD in the storm runoff on a Ib/acre/day basis, computed from




Table 11-1, and the concentrations in mg/L were approximately half of




those given in Table IV of Ref. 1.  Initial attempts to correct this




discrepancy in checking against Laguna Street data required adding the




equivalent of 5 percent of the suspended solids removed to the BOD




removed on the assumption that this was nonsoluble BOD not included in




the analysis for BOD in the APWA study  (Ref. 2) .  The addition of 10




percent was required in checking Selby Street,  San Francisco.  A closer




look, however, at the method of anlaysis used  in  that study does not




indicate that the BOD tests were run on  filtered  samples; therefore the




figures given in Table 11-2 should include  both soluble and nonsoluble




BOD.  The APWA figures would not include BOD due  to  leaves, grass, or




organic material not passing the 1/8-inch hardware cloth  used  to sareen




out the coarse solids,  it is also evident  that the  BOD figures in the




table cannot include BOD in the drainage from  roofs, areaways, parking




lots, grassed areas, and garden plots.   The latter areas  produce soluble
                                   191

-------
 BOD from decaying vegetation,  fertilizer applications,  and animal excreta.




 In Table 11-1,  taken from the  Cincinnati study,  the BOD in the  surface




 runoff amounts  to 4-1/2 percent of the  suspended solids load, as against




 an average of 5 mg per gram of dust and dirt  on  the streets  from the APWA




 study.   Until further data become  available during  field checking of the




 program,  it is  proposed that a percentage equivalent of the  suspended




 solids  removed  in each time-step be added to  the BOD obtained by applica-




 tion  of the procedures outlined herein.   It is anticipated that the




 percentage may  range from 3 to 10  percent.  The  current model includes a




 figure  of 5 percent.






 BOD from Catchbasins




 Catchbasins traditionally have been built on  inlets  to  combined sewers




 and storm drains  for the  purpose of removing  heavy  grit and  detritus




 which might otherwise  settle out in the  piping system.   The  construction




 provides  a trapped pocket of liquid and  solids in which the  organic




 component undergoes  decomposition between  rains.  The APWA study (Ref. 2,




 p.  85)  listed the  BOD  content  of 7  Catchbasins,  sampled after several




 days without rain.   The BOD varied  from  35 to 225 mg/L  at 5  commercial




 locations  and from 50  to  85 mg/L at 2 residental locations.  Limited




 sampling of 11 Catchbasins  in Washington,  D.C., during  storms was carried




out over a period  of one year  (Ref.  6).  The BOD ranged from 6  to 625




mg/L and averaged  126 mg/L.  Palmer  (Ref.  7)  sampled Catchbasins in




Detroit in 1949, reporting an initial BOD of 234 mg/L in the business




district decreasing to 96 mg/L after 2-1/2 hours.  These data show that




catchbasins constitute an important source of pollution.  The data quoted
                                  192

-------
above for Washington and Detroit include the BOD of the surface wash
flowing through the basins and do not correlate concentration with runoff
rate.

In order to determine how the pollution load in catchbasins at the start
of a storm is flushed into the sewers, the APWA study added 15 to 45
pounds of salt dissolved in water to a catchbasin containing 353 gallons.
Water from a hydrant was discharged through a hose and water meter to
the gutter adjacent to the catchbasin.  Samples were taken when various
total quantities up to 1,685 gallons had been added to and passed through
the basin.  A stirring device ensured thorough mixing of the samples,
which were analyzed for chloride content.  From the results the cumulative
percent of salt discharged and by inference the percent of pollution dis-
charged was plotted against gallons of liquid added  (Ref. 2, Figure 9,
p. 88).

The following empirical equation has been developed to fit the curve of
this figure:
                                          -x
                        R  =  100(1.0 - e1<6v)                       (11)

where  R  =  Percent of catchbasin source pollution removed
       x  =  Cumulative inflow to catchbasin  (gal.)
       v  =  Trapped volume of liquid in basin before storm  (gal.)

The number of catchbasins per acre, the assumed BOD concentration in
mg/L, and the average volume of liquid in the basins below the overflow
level are read into the program as data, and the pounds of BOD removed
                                  193

-------
 in each  time-step are  computed in accordance with the above equation and




 added  to the BOD washed off the surface during each  time-step.  No




 adjustments are made as long as the antecedent dry period is at least a




 day, but if the period between storms is less than a day the model




 multiplies the initial pollution load by the square  root of the length




 of the dry period expressed as a fraction of a day.  Thus fat the effect




 of catchbasins on pollutant concentration has been confined to BOD.






 Displacement and First Flush Effects




 The effect of the displacement or crowdiny of the dry weather pollution




 load in  combined sewers towards the outlet due to the increase in velocity




 in the sewers with increasing storm flow was satisfactorily modeled by




 the Transport Model.   It also takes account of deposition and scour in




 the sewers where it is a factor.






 Coliforms in Surface Runoff




 The method used to model coliforms in surface runoff is again based on




APWA (Ref. 2, p. 55) data related to studies conducted in Chicago.  The




APWA study reported that the confirmed total coliforms per gram of dust




and dirt swept from the streets were of the following magnitudes:






     Single-family residential areas             1.3x10




     Multi-family residential areas              2.7x10




     Commercial areas                            1.7x10






Using these values,  with appropriate unit conversion, provided a simple




estimate of total coliforms available in each subcatchment and, by direct
                                  194

-------
relationship with the suspended solids, the amount washed into storm




water inlets during each time-step of a storm event.






TEST APPLICATION




As a test of the method it was applied to the Laguna Street sewer in




San Francisco.  This is a combined system draining a steeply sloping




area of 370 acres, mostly apartment houses, with a population density of




68 persons per acre.  The drainage area rises to an elevation of about




300 feet above the outlet, and the trunk sewer, which is 8,600 feet long,




contains some relatively steep grades.  Ref. 3 contains measurements of




flow and quality, including suspended solids and BOD, for the storms of




March 10 and March 15, 1967.






The storm of March 10 was preceded by an antecedent dry period of 40




days, except for .01 inch of rain on 4 days and .04 inch on one day in




this period which were considered small enough to ignore.  As mentioned




earlier, using a street sweeping frequency of 7 days and an efficiency




of 75 percent, the accumulation of D/D on the ground at the start of the




rain was equal to 9.33 days.






Since the sewer system is of the combined type it was necessary to allow




for the suspended solids and BOD of the dry weather flow.  The BOD con-




tributed by the catchbasins was also included.  Furthermore, due to the




status of program development at the time these checks were made, it was




necessary to consider the area as a whole, instead of being made up 6f




a number of subareas which are routed through the Transport Model and




combined with other areas as the routing proceeds downstream.  To allow
                                  195

-------
 for  the possible  effect of this  difference  a displacement effect was




 temporarily included in the checking program to  substitute for  the  effect




 of the  Transport  Model.   All these  allowances had  very  little effect on




 the  suspended  solids but a considerable  effect on  the BOD.  Figure  11-1




 shows the  comparison with the reported results.  In view  of the differences




 between the cities of Chicago and Cincinnati,  which furnished the basic




 data for the method,  and San Francisco,  the agreement is  remarkable.




 The  agreement  at  peak flows is better than  at the  low flows, which  means




 that the total pounds of pollution  (the  product  of flow and concentration)




 are  being  modeled satisfactorily.   A similar comparison between the




 reported and computed total coliforms is shown in  Figure  11-2.






 The  storm  of March 15 was also used as a check,  considering suspended




 solids  only, and  neglecting any  contributions or effects  of the dry




 weather flow.  The antecedent dry period was assumed to be  5 days.  This




 storm began about 8:20 p.m.  with a  light rain which increased the overflow




 rate from  7 to 12.5  cfs  at 8:30  p.m.  The flow then steadily decreased




 to 2.0  cfs  at  9:30 p.m.,  followed by a large increase to  108 cfs at




 10:30 p.m.   It dropped to 11.4 cfs  at 11 p.m.  and  then  rose to  a secondary




peak of 76  cfs at 11:15 p.m., which decreased to 44 cfs by  midnight.




The method  successfully modeled  the suspended solids level  at the first




high peak at 10:30 p.m.  and at the  preceding and following  low  flows.




It was  low  on  the first minor  rise  at 8:30 p.m.  and hijh  on the second




high peak at 11:15 p.m.   It was  later discovered that significant rain




occurred on  four  of the preceding five days,  as  the records from the




Federal Building  show in  the  list which  follows.
                                  196

-------
           SAN FRANCISCO-LAGUNA ST.
           COMBINED  SEWER
           MAR. 10, 1967 STORM
                                                                        '(483)
                                  570 ACRES
                                  MULTI-FAMILY  RESIDENTIAL
                                  68 PERSONS/ACRE
—    0.00
;-
I
li
      0.10
     0.20
     25O
     200
                                                                                    400
                                                                                    350
                                                                                    300
                                                                                    35O
                                                                                    20O

      150
      IOO
                                                                                         £l
                                                                                         ;t
                                                                                         .
          Figure  11-1.
                TIME
               	^~

BOD AND  SS TEST  RESULTS FOR COMBINED SEWERS,
LAGUNA STREET, SAN FRANCISCO

-------
       8xlO
                       DRY WEATHER AVERAGE
                                         COMPUTED TOTAL
                                         COLIFORMS
                               REPORTED
                               TOTAL
                               COLIFORMS
       4x10
                     50        100        150        200

                 TIME  AFTER  BEGINNING  OF  OVERFLOW (MIN)
250
San Francisco-Laguna St.
Combined Sewer March 10,  1967  Storm
     Figure 11-2.  TOTAL COLIFORM TEST  RESULTS FOR COMBINED SEWERS
                                  198

-------
                      Date                 Pain (in.)




                    March 10                  .49




                    March 11                  .45




                    March 12                  .58




                    March 13                  .50




                    March 14                  .03




                    March 15                  .43







The rain on these days was all of the same order of magnitude as the rain




on March 10 during which storm 16 percent of the D/D initially on. the




ground was removed.  If it is assumed that the streets were swept on




March 11, and that each day's rain except the sprinkle on March 14




removed 16 percent of the D/D on the streets after allowing for the




addition of that day's contribution, there would have been an accumulation




of 4.84 days on the street at the beginning of the rain on March 15.




This analysis may justify the above described check based on 5 days.  It




also indicates that in such cases it may be desirable to assume a mini-




mum number of antecedent dry days, say 3 to 5 days, regardless of the




weather pattern.
                                   199

-------
                              SECTION 12




                    DRY WEATHER FLOW QUALITY MODEL




                                                                  Page




OBJECTIVES                                                         203




INITIAL CONCEPTS                                                   203




THE MODEL SUBROUTINE                                               204




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                            204




     Domestic Flow                                                 205




     Commercial Flow                                               205




     Industrial Flow                                               207




     Infiltration                                                  208




     Computations                                                  208




          Case 1                                                   208




          Case 2                                                    209




     Hourly Variation                                               209




     Default Values                                                 210




TEST APPLICATIONS                                                   211




CONCLUSION                                                          211
                                   201

-------
                              SECTION 12




                    DRY WEATHER FLOW QUALITY MODEL






OBJECTIVES




The objectives of the DWF Quality Model are to:




     1.  Provide reasonable estimates of the modeled quality constituent




         concentrations based on non-storm influences.




     2.  Function compatibly with other modeling subroutines with




         emphasis on time and spatial variations.




     3.  Require minimal input data consistent with desired results.






INITIAL CONCEPTS




One way to establish a valid estimate of DWF quality is to sample and




analyze it.  For larger systems such sampling may be accomplished on a




routine basis at the municipal sewage treatment facility.  Since these




data would normally, or most economically, be available at only one or




a few points in the prototype system, a means to extrapolate or apportion




results over the entire system is required.






A second approach for estimating DWF quality is to  assume average per




capita values and to compute results on the basis of population distri-




bution.






These concepts, coupled with variations according to  flow source  (resi-




dential, industrial and/or commercial), family income, and other record-




ed parameters, form the basis for the model development.
                                   203

-------
THE MODEL SUBROUTINE




The DWF Quality model is embedded within subroutine FILTH in the




Transport Block.  Subroutine FILTH also computes the DWF quantity




estimate and provides a vehicle for adding infiltration  (INFIL) so that




both concentrations and mass values may be determined.






Since the Transport Model operates on a true simulation theory—i.e.,




pipe configurations and flow source locations are critical—DWF computa-




tions are designed to yield representative flows at several geographically




distributed entry points.






The sum of all entry point values is, of course, the total DWF of the




system.






Furthermore, if the entry point values are summed in sequence starting




with the most upstream elements, valid subtotals may be printed out at




intervals along the main trunk sewer for intermediate checks.






Once picked up by the Transport Model the DWF is mixed and routed in a




manner identical to the storm water routing, discussed elsewhere.






THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT




Dry weather flow (that flow measured in combined sewer systems between




storm events)  is assumed to be divisible into the following four




categories:




     Domestic flow




     commercial flow




     Industrial flow




     Infiltration.




                                  204

-------
Domestic Flow




The domestic flow represents the flow from the homes of all residents




of an area whether they be barracks, apartments, multi-family, or single-




family dwellings.






The first concern in computing domestic flow quality is a population




estimate, which for most urban areas is readily available in Census




Tract data tabulations.  First approximations as to the quality makeup




may use average values in Ib/capita/day or similar units taken from




standard sanitary engineering textbooks, such as Fair and Geyer




(Ref.  1).






Next in importance is an estimate of the percentage of households




equipped with garbage grinders, as  these units appreciably increase the




waste concentrations in the  flow.   A sample comparison of ground garbage




with sewage is shown in Table 12-1  as taken from Haseltine  (Ref. 2).






Finally the strength of the  wastewater  flows, as well as volume, may




vary with family income as shown in Table 12-2 taken from Watson  (Ref.  3)






Commercial Flow




Flows from areas zoned for commercial use may be expected to  include




domestic flow from the overlapping  resident population plus flows from




stores, offices, and other business units  (laundromats, movies, hotels,




etc.).  Hubbell  (Ref. 4) found these flows generally similar  to resi-




dential area flows.  In the  same work, Hubbell also reported  hospital,




resident, school, and institutional flows to be generally stronger  (lb/




capita/day) than "normal" domestic  flow.  Because hospitals,  schools,
                                   205

-------
           Table 12-1.  COMPARISON OF QUALITY CONSTITUENTS
                        OF GROUND GARBAGE WITH SEWAGE
                                   Ground
                                   Garbage,          Sewage,
                                Ib/capita/day     Ib/capita/day
Total solids
Total volatile solids
Suspended matter
5 Day BOD
Fats and greases
Nitrogen
Moisture
0.15
0.13
0.10
0.08
0.03
0.002
0.45
0.55
0.32
0.20
0.17
0.05
0.04

     Source:  T. R. Haseltine, "Addition of Garbage to Sewage,"
              1950  (Ref. 2).
           Table 12-2.  COMPARISON OF QUALITY CONSTITUENTS
                        WITH FAMILY INCOME
    Item                      Home 1          Home 2          Home 3
Approximate market value
Total number of people
Water consumption,
gal . /capita/day
Suspended solids,
Ib/capi ta/day
COD, Ib/capi ta/day
BOD5, Ib/capita/day
Grease, Ib/capita/day
$45,000
5

78

0.23
0.45
0.35
0.06
$25,000
5

66

0.16
0.30
0.16
0.18
$18,000
5

24

0.10
0.18
0.10
0.13
Source:  K. S. Watson et al., "The Contribution from the Individual
         Home to the Sewer System," 1967  (Ref. 3).
                                   206

-------
and institutions are better represented as  point rather than  area  sources

of waste, they are most easily modeled as special cases of industrial

flow discussed below.  Selected findings by Hubbell are reported in

Table 12-3.
              Table 12-3.  ESTIMATED TYPICAL WASTEWATER
                           FLOW AND CHARACTERISTICS
Source
Suburban residential
Hospitals
Factories
Motels
Shopping centers
Schools, non-resident
Schools, resident
Institutions
Flow ,
gal . /capita/day
75
175
20
50
60*
10
75
120
BOD,
Ib/capita/day
0.17
0.25
0.10
0.17
0.18*
0.03
>0.17
0.31
ss,
Ib/capita/day
0.20
—
0.10
0.20
0.18*
—
>0.20
0.31
*Per employee.
Source:   J.  W.  Hubbell,  "Commercial and Industrial Wastewater Holdings,"
          1962 (Ref.  4).
Industrial Flow

Flows  from areas zoned for industrial use, like commercial areas, may

be expected  to include domestic flow from overlapping  resident population

and domestic-type wastes  from employees.  Most important, however,  are

the process  flows  (wastes generated by wet industrial  processes), which

vary with the  type  of product produced and rate of production less

removals accomplished prior  to discharge  (pretreatment).  Measured

characteristics  are used  to  the extent available  in  model applications

and are supplemented, when necessary, by generalized data, such  as  may

be found in  Rudolph (Ref. 5). In modeling,  one data card is required
                                  207

-------
 for each significant industrial process  flow source describing its

 average daily  flow  and constituent quality coroentrations.


 Infiltration

 Infiltration is assumed  to be pure  (free of contaminants) unless known

 to be contaminated  by passage through soils having significant soluble

 impurities of  the type being modeled.


 Computations

 Computations proceed along one of two paths depending upon whether

 measured characteristics are available  (Case 1), or whether average per

 capita values  must  be assumed  (Case 2).  In each case the quality con-

 stituents modeled are BOD, total suspended solids, and  total coliforms.


Case 1.  In this situation the total quantity and characteristics of the

average DWF are known, either from direct sampling and analyses or

available treatment facility data, and the quantities and distribution

of DWF and infiltration are known from previous modeling routines.  The

proper distribution of the known waste characteristics is accomplished

by first deducting the non-domestic flows and characteristics from the

total values, following the equation:


 / total flow and \
 I characteristics)   ~  (infiltration)
                  7                                                   (1)
                      /process flows and\  _   /domestic flows and\
                                          )      I characteristics   J
                       \ characteristics


Further refinement in the estimate of domestic flow and characteristics

is made by weighting the values according to the fraction of commercial
                                  208

-------
flow, high income residential flow, average income residential flow, low




income residential flow, and the percent usage of garbage grinders.






For BOD and suspended solids the base average quality characteristics




are then determined from the weighted estimates in terms of Ib/day/cfs




of flow.  The base average for coliforms is simply the measured value,



MPN/day, divided by the total population.






These base averages are then coupled with the appropriate modifiers




(income, commercial use, garbage grinders, or population) and flow to




reconstruct the DWF and characteristics for each subarea within the




system.  Process flows, characteristics, and infiltration are likewise




added at the appropriate geographical location.






Case 2.  In this case the procedure is similar to Case 1 except that the




base average quality constituents are computed directly, based on average




textbook values or figures from earlier model runs.






Hourly Variation




The results of the foregoing computations yield average daily values.




Since both flow volumes and quality characteristics change throughout




the day  (Refs. 6,7), hourly variation factors are incorporated to adjust




these averages to real time conditions corresponding to the start and




duration of the storm event.






Further discussion and explanation of the procedures are given in the




"User's Manual."
                                   209

-------
Default Vrlues

Default values used in programming the model are built in as follows:

                               MODIFIERS
                            Item                    Value


               Commercial flows                      0.9

               Low family income, less than
                 $7,000 per yr                       0.8

               Average family income,
                 $7,000-15,000 per yr                1.0

               High family income, greater
                 than $15,000 per yr                 1.2

               Garbage grinders in use
                 (in addition to income modifier)    1.3
              AVERAGE QUALITY CONSTITUENTS  (Case 2 only)

                  Item                          Value
        BOD, average family income      0.20 Ib/capita/day

        SS, average family income       0.22 Ib/capita/day

        Total coliforms  (Ref. 1)        200 billion/capita/day

        Flow without infiltration       85 gal./capita/day

        Flow with infiltration          100 gal./capita/day


Family incomes are based on reported 1960 census data.  The  table values

were selected as being somewhat credible and can readily be  changed  for

specific applications.  Hourly variation factors for flow and quality

are considered too important to be locked into the program and thus  must

be fed in as basic data for each new system.
                                   210

-------
TEST APPLICATIONS




The lack of data reporting DWF characteristics measured simultaneously




at several points in a conveyance system precluded any comprehensive




test applications.  Good DWF quality monitoring results for single




points in two San Francisco systems (Ref. 6), however, provided a limited




base for model analysis.






The most significant outcome of these tests was the realization of the




significance of the compounded factors for hourly variation.  Measured




values of both flow and quality variations showed the extreme variation




of pounds of BOD released per 10-minute interval exceeded a ratio of




50 to 1 (largest 10-minute release divided by the smallest) in one day.






CONCLUSION



A simple modeling technique has been devised to distribute quality




constituents known at a single downstream point to their approximate




source locations within a catchment area.  This distribution is based




on land use, population, family income, use of garbage grinders, and




known or estimated process flows.






This breakdown is necessary  to account properly for routing in the




conveyance  system during storm events and to support  the Decay  (sediment-




scour) model discussed  in Section  13.






Where quality constituents are not known, average values are provided




for initial approximations.
                                   211

-------
Hourly variations in DWF quality constituents may exceed a range of




50 to 1 between extreme values in one day; thus the magnitude of DWF




quality contribution to combined sewer overflows is heavily dependent




on the real time occurrence of the storm event.
                                   212

-------
                               SECTION 13




                               DECAY MODEL




                                                                   Page





OBJECTIVE                                                           215




THE MODEL SUBROUTINE                                                215




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                             216




     Literature Survey                                              216




     Methodology                                                    217




TEST APPLICATION                                                    22°




     Selby Street, San Francisco                                    221




     FMC Project                                                    224




CONCLUSION                                                          229
                                    213

-------
                               SECTION 13




                               DECAY MODEL






OBJECTIVE



The Decay model was developed to route pollutants and to account for the




decay of pollutants during transit in a sewer system.






THE MODEL SUBROUTINE



The computer model consists of two parts, a quality section (subroutine




QUAL) and a dry weather load section  (subroutine DWLOAD); both are in-




corporated into the Transport Model.  The basic method61ogy developed




for the Decay model is found in QUAL.  An extension of this concept is




the DWLOAD section.






In QUAL, mass balance and first order decay of pollutants provide a




basis for the model.  The general assumptions are that mixing within each




sewer element in the system is instantaneous and complete, and  that the




nonconservative pollutants decay according to the first order reaction.




An unidirectional  transportation concept was used to describe the move-




ment of pollutants through any specified sewer system,  given sewer data




and concurrent flows and velocities.  The four quality parameters con-




sidered in the model are BOD, DO, suspended solids,  and a conservative




pollutant  (P).  Quality constituents  such as coliforms  are handled




as a conservative  pollutant.  A sediment uptake  and  deposition  phenomenon




is conroproated into the model for  the  case of suspended solids.






Relative to the sediment uptake and deposition concept  developed for




QUAL, DWLOAD was developed to establish the initial  sediment load within
                                  215

-------
the sewer system.  An iterative method is used to estimate daily sediment




accumulation in each section of the sewer under DWF conditions.  Also,




using the assumption that the daily sediment build-up is constant over




consecutive dry weather days, initial sediment load estimates for each




conduit are made possible.






THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT




An investigation into the area of the decay of pollutants and sediment




transport in sewers did not reveal any practical applications of extant




theoretical developments and experiments.  Thus, model development was




geared toward a methodology that would encompass the major facttors and




information obtained from the literature search combined with present




knowledge of river systems.






Literature Survey




Further research is needed in the theory related to the decay of pollu-




tants and sediment transport in sewer systems.  Some doubt exists as to




the significance of quality change, other than mixing, during rainfall-




runoff periods.  It has been suggested (Ref. 1) that the time of transit




through the sewer system is too short to consider bacterial decay or




reduction of BOD with time.






Decay of pollutants and sediment transport, as with infiltration, has a




basis for theoretical analysis  (Ref. 2).  Raths and McCauley studied




sediment transport in sewers (Ref. 3).  The FMC Corporation also has




conducted a study on periodic flushing and sediment transport  (Ref. 4).




Through these analyses, it is evident that particle size and specific
                                   216

-------
gravity, depth of flow, and the slope of the conduit are important

factors affecting deposition.  Hill et al. (Ref. 5) in a recent study, in-

vestigated the flat bed phenomenon in alluvial channels.  Also useful in

developing a methodology for sediment uptake and deposition were the

velocity relationships in Fair and Geyer (Ref. 6) and in Carstens1 work

on heterogeneous flow of solids in conduits  (Ref. 7).  Data needs relative

to particle size were obtained from an APWA report  (Ref. 8).  Oxygen

balance in sewers is described by Gustafsson and Westberg  (Ref. 1).

These authors applied the classic Streeter-Phelps equation (Ref. 9} to

flowing sewage and solved for the oxygen uptake as a function of time,

temperature, slope, and flow conditions in sewers.


Methodology

The general equation of the model representing continuity  of mass is as

follows:


       Pounds in         Pounds in
       element at     =  element at     +  Pounds    -  Pounds   +
       new time-step     old time-step     entering     leaving  -

                                                                      (1)
                         Pounds         Pounds entering or
                         decayed or  +_ leaving  from
                         generated      source or sink


The mathematical rigor related to the development of the Decay  model,

using the concept of Eq. 1 and expanding it into its mathematical  form,

is given in Appendix B.  Assuming complete mixing along with the use of
                                    217

-------
 a finite  difference  scheme,  the  final computer model  for  routing pollu-



 tants  is  in  the  form:
"n+1
                                   D2})  -
                (C.  Q.  )   ,  + D,,
                  in*in n+1     2
                                                                      (2)
 where   C   =  Cone,  of pollutant in element (Ib/cf)



        V   =  Volume in element (cf)



        n   =  Time-step number



        Q   =  Flow rate (cfs)



        D   =  Decay  rate or  oxygen utilization rate  (I/day)



        D   =  Growth rate or reaeration rate  (I/day)



        S   =  Maximum growth or oxygen  saturation value (mg/L)



        At   =  Time increment (sec)






As mentioned earlier for the case of suspended solids, a sediment uptake



and deposition model was incorporated into the Decay Model.  When inves-



tigating deposition in sanitary sewers, Raths and McCauley (Ref. 3)



claimed that consideration must be given to the importance of:  type,



size, and specific gravity of potential deposition material; quantity of



flow; depth of flow;  velocity of flow; pipe slope; pipe alignment; pipe



size, pipe joints; pipe age;  pipe roughness coefficients; and sewer



construction practices.  Thus, in developing the sediment model, the



objectives were to relate the variables as closely as possible to the
                                  218

-------
factors affecting deposition and to use the information available from




existing models, such as the Transport Model.







The sediment model consists of two subroutines which follow similar




mathematical procedures.  First, DWLOAD determines the amount of sedi-




ment accumulated in each conduit since the last cleansing of the sewers.




DWLOAD calculations are performed prior to flow routing, thus establish-




ing initial sediment conditions in the conduits before actual routing.




The next subroutine (ROUTE) determines the amount of sediment uptake and




deposition during storm conditions.  This subroutine is used continually




during flow routing to determine  (cin)n+1-   E
-------
Using Eq. 3 as a basis for the model, the final equations resulting from




the mathematical development of a sediment algorithm are
                  Sc  =  Sc + P x (T  + T  + T )  x At                (4)
            .     ,
                       I (1 - P) x (T± + T2 + T3)J
                             Sc  =  P x Sc                            (6)







where  Css  =  Concentration of suspended solids (Ib/cf)




       P    =  Fraction of sediment in suspension with diameter greater




               than or equal to the critical particle diameter




       Sc   =  Amount of settled sediment in element  (Ib)






The process is that for each time-step the amount of sediment at the




bottom of each conduit is determined by Eq. 4.  Then, using Eq. 5, the




amount of sediment to be routed is determined.  This information is then




used in Eq. 2.  Finally, Eq. 6 updates the amount of sediment at the




bottom of the sewer element for the next time-step.  The detailed devel-




opment of the model is presented in Appendix B.






TEST APPLICATION




Sensitivity analyses were performed with the Decay model using data from




the Selby Street, San Francisco, combined sewer system  (Ref. 10) and  the




FMC Corporation study (Ref. 4).  Results from the FMC sewer flushing




project were used for a detailed investigation of the sediment uptake




and deposition model.
                                   220

-------
Selby Street/ San Francisco




The main test areas used for these analyses are shown in Figure 13-1.




Test Area 1 includes the first ten elements and Test Area 2 includes




these ten elements plus the main trunk sewers in the system.  In the




simulation of conservative pollutants/ the initial conditions for the




sewer system were assumed at zero concentration.  For nonconservative




pollutants, i.e., BOD and suspended solids, initial conditions were set




at DWF concentrations, but for DO, initial conditions were assumed at




zero concentration.






Analyses were first performed for a mathematical breakdown of Eq. 2.




These tests confirmed the existence of consistency in the continuity of




mass and the complete mixing assumption.  Conservative pollutants were




then studied using Test Areas 1 and 2.  The procedure was to check the




system randomly at the elements to see if the total pollutant quantity




input was equal to total output.  These runs were successful using




different pollutograph concentrations.






The next step was to study the model's reaction to different values of




Dl and D2 in Eq. 2.  The rate constant Dl was analyzed according to




information obtained on the range of  the rate constant  for  deoxygenation




in raw sewage at 20°C  (Ref. 1).  Values used for  the  decay  rate are in




the range 0 £ Dl <_ 3.0.  Results of the runs are  shown  in Figure 13-2.




As anticipated, the analyses revealed that  there  is a dependency only on




the duration and intensity of  the storm and not on the pollutograph used.




System response to the DO quality parameter also  was  tested for various




hypothetical situations.  Using Dl, D2, and S,  these  results  showed  that







                                   221

-------
NJ
NJ
NJ
                                                                     Test Area  2


                                                                   A Inputs (manhole)  from runoff

                                                                   • Manholes  (no input)


                                                                     Notes:  (1)   73 elements total.
                                                                              (2)   1 in. = approximately
                                                                                           2,000 ft
                  23
                            Figure 13-1.  SCHEMATIC  DRAWING OF TEST AREAS,  COMBINED SEWER
                                           (NUMBERED),  SELBY STREET, SAN FRANCISCO

-------
                   3.0i
to
to
U)
            cu
            g
            01



            O
                   2.0-
                                                  November 14  Storm
                                                     November 6 Storm
                                1.0
2.0
     4iO        5.0


% DEPLETION OF  BOD
                                                                                     6.0
                                                      TiO
                                                                                                           8.O
                             Figure 13-2.  RESULTS OF SENSITIVITY RUNS FOR RATE CONSTANT FOR DECAY  (Dl),

                                           STORMS OF NOVEMBER 6  AND 14

-------
reaeration of DO occurred and that the model was functioning as expected.




Prom the results of these tests, the rate constants for deoxygenation




and reaeration were set as 0.2 per day and 0.3 per day, respectively.






Preliminary tests also were performed on the sediment model using the




Selby Street drainage area shown in Figure 13-1.  Storm runoff hydro-




graphs and hypothetical pollutographs at element one were used to study




the sediment build-up in the conduits for Test Areas 1 and 2.  Compari-




sons were made of flow versus sediment build-up in the conduit for re-




corded storms (Ref. 10) in the area.  Results of the November 6 and




November 14 storms are shown in Figures 13-3 to 13-5.  Note that in




Figure 13-3 the initial sediment build-up, or bed load, is for one dry




weather day, and in Figure 13-4 the bed load is for 47 dry weather days.




Results were as expected which confirmed that the model is a stable




system.






FMC Project




Analyses using experimental data from the FMC sewer flushing project




proved very rewarding in evaluating the performance of the sediment model.




Computer simulations were made using data from the physical model




developed by FMC.  Results from these simulations were then compared




with the experimental results of the physical model.  A percentage of




deviation was calculated for the suspended solids deposited and the out-




flow of suspended solids.  Results from some of these tests are shown in




Table 13-1.  An 18-inch pipe with a length of 795 feet was used in this




comparison.
                                  224

-------
ro
to
Ul
       Q
       W
       w
                                                                        Outflow Hydrograph from

                                                                              Manhole 71
                                                                                                     1,000
                                                                                                    -800
                                                                                                    -600
                                                                                                    -400
                                                                                                    -BOO
                         1,800    3j500    5,400
7^200   9,OOO   10,800   I2J60O   14400    16,200   18,000


   TIME  (SEC)
                                                            w
                                                            ft

                                                            i
                        Figure 13-3.  BED LOAD IN CONDUIT 72, STORM OF NOVEMBER 6,  DWDAY=1

-------
                             DWLOAD Bed Load
10
a\
                                                                           Outflow Hydrograph from

                                                                                 Manhole 71
                                                                                                      1,000
                                                                                                      -000
                                                                                                      -600
                                                                                                      -400
                                                                                                             U
                                                         §
                                                                                                      200
                            1,800   3,600   5,400
7,200   9,000   IOJ900   I2JBOO  14,400   16,200   (8.000



  TIME  (SEC)
                         Figure 13-4.  BED  LOAD IN CONDUIT 72, STORM OF NOVEMBER 6, DWDAY=47

-------
to
K>

          H
          Q
          W
          to
                                                   Outflow Hydrograph from

                                                         Manhole 71
                        poo    apoo
54OO   7,2OO    %QOO   10,800   12/BOO   14400



             TIME v(SEC)



Figure 13-5.  BED LOAD IN CONDUIT 72,

              STORM OF NOVEMBER 14, DWDAY=1.0
                                                                                                   •300
                                                                                                   -ZOO
                                                                                                    too
I8POO

-------
             Table  13-1.  TEST RESULTS USING FMC PROJECT  DATA,
                          BED LOAD ANALYSIS FOR 18-INCH SEWER WITH A LENGTH  OF  795 FEET*






to
to
00
(1)
Flow,
gpm
50
10
30
30
30
(2)
ss
Input ,
mg/L
230
686
201
201
201
(3)
Assumed
Specific
Gravity
2.70
2.70
2.70
2.49
2.51
(4)
SS
(5)
Deposited
Measured, Simulated,
Ib
5.133
15.744
14.369
14.369
14.369
Ib
8.573
23.233
17.165
12.923
13.319
(6)
Deviation,
percent
40.13%
32.23
19.45
10.06
7.30
(7)
SS
Measured,
Ib
57.167
35.656
61.131
61.131
61.131
(8)
Outflow
Simulated,
Ib
51.977
28.356
58.415
62.659
62.263
(9)
Deviation,
percent
9.98%
25.74
4.44
2.50
1.82
*Pipe slope =0.1 ft/100 ft; roughness coefficients = 0.0099.

-------
Without further information on the characteristics of the suspended




solids at the input, it is felt that practical assumptions are made con-




cerning Shield's criterion, specific gravity, and the sewer sieve analysis




relationship, as presented in Appendix B.  Columns 4 and 5 in Table 13-1




illustrate a reduction in the percentage of deviation after a logical




weighted average adjustment on specific gravity was made with the FMC




data supplied on volatile solids.






CONCLUSION
A general model has been developed which describes the movement of pollu-




tants during transit in a prespecified sewer system.  It has the capabil-




ities of accounting for decay of nonconservative pollutants and allowing




for sediment uptake and deposition when dealing with suspended solids.







The analyses performed verified the concepts used for complete mixing,




continuity of mass, deoxygenation and reaeration, and sediment transport.
                                   229

-------
                              SECTION 14




                    RECEIVING WATER QUALITY MODEL




                                                                  Page




OBJECTIVES                                                    .     233




RELATION TO STORM WATER PROGRAM                                    234




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                            234




     Quality Routing                                               234




     Solution Procedure                                            237




     Simulation Time Interval                                      238




     Linear Property                                               239




THE MODEL SUBROUTINES                                              239




TEST APPLICATION                                                   240
                                   231

-------
                              SECTION 14




                     RECEIVING WATER QUALITY MODEL






OBJECTIVES




The ultimate goal of the Storm Water Management program is to assess




and evaluate the cost effectiveness of various pollution control mea-




sures.  The objective of the Receiving Water Quality model  is to pro-




vide a means for measuring the effect.






Runoff resulting from storm water carries with it various kinds of




pollutants.  Discharged into the receiving water, these pollutants are




transported and dispersed into the aquatic environment.  The job of the




Receiving Water Quality model is to trace or route the pollutants,




determining their temporal and spatial variation in the system.






Since the quality routing requires the receiving water quantity infor-




mation, the model was developed to operate only in conjunction with the




Receiving Water Quantity model described in Section 10.  Both models




use the same geometric representation which is capable of depicting the




temporal and spatial distribution of pollutants as well as the hydro-




dynamics.  To facilitate a rapid evaluation of the required removal by




various treatment processes, however, the model is flexible in that it




can perform several water quality simulations for a given quantity




solution.  This is desirable especially when many treatment processes




modify the removal rate of pollutants rather than the change in hydrau-




lic characteristics.
                                   233

-------
 RELATION TO STORM WATER PROGRAM
                                            storm Agate r hvdrngraph  and
pollutograph inputs^^r^m^i^r.^



                                           water  Qu^t^y mQdei •   Ifc also
accepts from RECEIV the quantity solution  of  the  Receiving Water Quantity



model .






Upon  completion of the computations, the model prints and plots the




concentration  of various  water quality constituents versus time for a




selected  number of junctions.   The execution of the program will then




be  terminated.






THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT




Pollutants  received from  storm water and other inflows can basically be




classified  into three  types,  i.e., a conservative _substance such as




chlorideipn;  a nonconservative substance such as BOD; and a conserva-
 'iMWiaWMM'l"a*>|MB*   - ...... -TII-— n»— •* -"— ^ '     ~"— **"'•'"'''*— ---r in ri ijj-iiir   """^'miHiUMi mi in ....... ~"


                           oxygen,  that can jje consumed by a noncon-
servative  substance  BOD.   A conservative substance is defined as the
one that does not decay itself,  whereas a nonconservative substance is



the one that will decay in proportion to the amount of material present,



i.e., a first order  reaction.  There are other types of substances, but



these three classes  are of concern in the present model development.






Quality Routing



Physical dispersion  of a quality constituent in a receiving water is



caused by transport  phenomena, including advective transport and diffu-




sion.  If the quality  constituent is nonconservative,  it will be
                                   234

-------
subjected to a continuous chemical reaction of decay.  In addition,



physical importation of water to the junction and/or extraction of water



from the junction may carry with it the quality constituent.  The alge-



braic sum of import and export may be termed a source or sink.  The



source and/or sink may include that of tidal exchange at the mouth of



the estuary.





These mechanisms are operated simultaneously to modify the water quality



constituent in all parts of the receiving water system, described by



junctions.  The basic equation describing these processes is the con-



tinuity equation.  It can be written in finite difference form as



follows:



                     Ac.         Ac.
                     -A--  =  - v ?—*- - kc. + s,                      (1)
                     At          Ax      j    3                      v
where  c  =  Constituent concentration



       t  =  Time



       v  =  Velocity averaged over the cross-section of the reach or



             channel



       x  =  Distance



       k  =  Decay constant



       s  =  Source and/or sink



       j  =  Junction number





The first term on the right hand side of Eq. 1 is an advective transport



which, in the case of a non-branch system, is illustrated by Figure 14-la.



According to the expression, the advective transport simply translates
                                   235

-------
                                                    o
                                                    
-------
 the  linear  concentration  gradient  along  the  flow path during  the short



 period  of time  interval.   During that period,  the  concentration at  the



 downstream  junction  increases  or decreases depending on  the sign of



 concentration gradient.





 It is noted that Eq.  1 does not include  a term for diffusion  transport.



 Experience
used,  the major_transgort mechanism  is by  advection  and  thus  the



diffusion term can be  safely neglected.
          iMM^«M
-------
time-step are furnished by the Receiving Water Quantity model.  The




initial value of parameters is substituted into the equation to determine




the changing rate of concentration.  The concentration is continuously




updated from one time-step to the next.






Sequential computation proceeds as follows:




     1.  Compute the rate change of concentration due to the advective




         transport.




     2.  Determine the amount of decay, if any.




     3.  Calculate the import and export amount.




     4.  Compute the new concentration of the quality constituent at




         the end of the period based on the above calculations.






These procedures are repeated for all the junctions before the compu-




tation is advanced to the next period.  Six constituents can be solved




simultaneously.  When the solution for BOD is made, its exertion on




DO and the resulting DO levels are determined simultaneously.






This is again the solution procedure for the familiar initial value




problem.  To increase the accuracy of computation, a modified Euler's




method was used by instigating a half-time-step  computation.






Simulation Time Interval




Water quality routing does not have the severe stability problem found




in the Receiving Water Quantity  model solution,  gxpe^ignce has shown




that an hourly__intgrval_of computation provides  good results  for both




lake and estuary systems.
                                   238

-------
As a rule, the time-step for quality computation is much longer than




that for quantity computation.  The intermediate hydraulic results




computed in each quality time-step (an hour)  are therefore averaged for




quality simulation.






Linear Property




Because the continuity equation governing the water quality response




as posed is linear, the pollutional effect of each point source can be




computed separately.  The overall effect is additive of each individual




discharge provided that all the flow quantities of discharge have




entered the quantity computation.  This property simplifies the eval-




uation of the cost-effectiveness of the treatment by any given storm




water polluter.






THE MODEL SUBROUTINES
The program consists of  four core subroutines,  i.e., SWQUAL, INQUAL,




LOOPQL, and QPRINT.  SWQUAL is  the subroutine called by RECEIV to  take




over  control of  the quality subroutine with  the assistance  of  other




subroutines.






INQUAL is  the  subroutine for reading input data.   Depending on the




number of  days to be simulated,  SWQUAL will  call LOOPQL once per day  to




perform the quality routing described previously.   QPRINT prints quality




response for various constituents at a selected number of time-steps




and junctions  for engineering interpretation of results.
                                   239

-------
TEST APPLICATION




The general method of quality routing described herein has been proven




valid for several prototype systems and conditions receiving waste load




inputs other than the impulse type pollutograph (Refs. 1,2,3).  Actual




data, however, were not available for the verification of the receiving




water quality dynamic response to the storm water pollution.






Hypothetical cases were therefore used to test for the functionality of




the model.  This was done by imposing a wide variety of input conditions




on an assumed receiving water system.  The system response was then




evaluated and compared with the system behavior that can reasonably be




expected to occur.






The hydraulic system used for the quality routing is the same as the




one used for the Receiving Water Quantity Model (see Figure 10-1).






Briefly, each channel was 10,000 feet long, with a depth ranging from




15 feet at channel 28 to 20 feet throughout the open water body.  Dry




weather flow was 2,000 cfs at junction 18, 500 cfs at junction 16,




50 cfs at junctions 10 and 14, and 20 cfs at junction 13.  Input hydro-




graphs were superimposed on the dry weather flow and a prescribed sinus-




oidal tide was imposed on junction 1.






In addition to hydraulic inputs, the Receiving Water Quality model




accepted a waste input to junction 14 as shown in Figure 14-2.  A




similar waste input with a peak value of 250,000 pounds per day was




imposed on junction 13.  The model was asked to evaluate the quality




impact of waste discharge from these particular point sources.  Note
                                  240

-------
          1200    1500-1
    5-
   1000
I
V)

o


1


I
3
   4-
    800
i
   3-
   2
-  400-
o
Q.
    I-
   200-
                                                    HYDROGRAPH
                                            BOO  POLLUTOGRAPH
                                                         INFLOW BOO CONCENTRATION
                                                       I

                                                  TIDAL CYCLES
              Figure 14-2.   INPUT TO NODE 14 OF  TEST SYSTEM
                                      241

-------
that the irflow BOD concentration decreased with time as it is typically




observed in the field.  The product of the hydrograph and the inflow




concentration constituted the BOD pollutograph in the units of mass




emission rate.  The shape of the pollutograph resembled that of the




hydrograph.






The receiving water body was started with zero BOD concentration through-




out the system and the saturation for DO was assumed as 8.0 mg/L.  The




responses of BOD and DO at junction 14 are plotted in Figure 14-3b and




3c.  Figure 14-3a shows the flow characteristics in channels 24 and 25




which meet at junction 14.






As expected, the receiving water BOD at junction 14 peaked at about the




same time as the BOD pollutograph.  This is because junction 14 was the




immediate node receiving the waste input.






The high concentration of BOD was then transported and dispersed seaward




until the next flood tide which brought it back at reduced concentration.




This is the reason for the secondary peak of BOD concentration after one




tidal cycle, even though the pollutograph became essentially zero at




that time.






The DO concentration was noted to be high when BOD was low and vice




versa.  During the first tidal cycle, the DO level remained above 6.6




mg/L.  This is understandable because the water volume flowing through




junction 14 was relatively high and thus it provided a large resource




of DO for BOD exertion.  During the second tidal cycle, the DO level
                                   242

-------
o
Q
     10
O
Q
O
OJ
     60
     40
20
                                   CHANNEL 24 FLOW
                   TIDAL  CYCLES  (DAY)


  Figure 14-3.  RECEIVING WATER QUALITY MODEL RESULTS

                FOR NODE 14 OF TEST  SYSTEM
                          243

-------
was lowered to 5.3 mg/L, resulting from the accumulative effect of the




BOD and DO relationship in the estuary.






These results and others that were tested for the lake system pointed




out the reasonableness of the answers.  Real verification, however,




awaited testing which is described in Volume II of this report.
                                  244

-------
                               SECTION 15




                            TREATMENT MODEL




                                                                   Page




OBJECTIVES                                                          247




BACKGROUND                                                          247




THE MODEL SUBROUTINE                                                248




PUMPING STATIONS                                                    251




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT  (Treatment Processes)                       252




     Bar Racks  (Treatment Option 12)                                252




     Fine Screens  (Treatment Options 33 and  34)                     254




     Sedimentation  (Treatment Option 35)                            255




     Dissolved Air Flotation  (Treatment Option 32)                  259




     Dissolved Air Flotation Preceded by Fine




       Screens  (Treatment Option 33)                                262




     Microstrainers  (Treatment Option 42)                           264




     High Rate Filters  (Treatment Option 43)                        277




     Effluent Screens  (Treatment Option  52)                         283




     Chlorination  (Treatment Option 72)                             284




SIZE OF DESIGN EVENT AND QUALITY OF TOTAL  OVERFLOW




  RELEASED TO RECEIVING WATERS                                      286
                                   245

-------
                               SECTION 15




                            TREATMENT MODEL






OBJECTIVES




The objectives of the Treatment model are to:




     1.  Provide the capability of modeling a considerable number




         of alternative sewage treatment processes to be located at




         or near a sewer outfall, and to restrict certain process




         combinations which are deemed inadmissible.




     2.  Simulate improvements in overflow quality produced by each




         component of the selected combination of treatment processes.




     3.  Summarize data required for the estimation of treatment




         costs for the specified installation.






BACKGROUND




Processes applicable to the treatment of overflows from combined sewers




and storm sewer discharges should meet the following criteria:




     1.  They should operate efficiently when called upon after varying




         and extended periods of inactivity.




     2.  They should have large throughput capacity.




     3.  They should be simple and compact, requiring as little land




         area as possible.




     4.  They should not produce odors, either during or between storms.




     5.  The benefit to the community should be worth the cost.






To meet these criteria, there are available the existing primary treat-




ment processes, supplemented by chlorination, which are familiar to all
                                   247

-------
sanitary engineers, plus a variety of ultrafine straining and filtration




processes now undergoing intensive investigation under FWQA sponsorship.




Data incorporated in the model relative to these latter processes are




based on currently available information and may require revision when




results of the completed investigations are published.






Storage, either alone or combined with sedimentation, may be used to




reduce the hydraulic capacity of the treatment units and is incorporated




in the model.






The first criterion eliminates the use of biological processes, except




in specially favorable situations, because of the difficulty and cost of




maintaining a large supply of active biological media during dry weather




to have available in sufficient quantity during storms.  For this reason




biological processes are not included in the model.






THE MODEL SUBROUTINE




The Transport Model will provide a hydrograph of flow and pollutographs




of BOD, suspended solids, and coliforms at the point of discharge.  These




either will pass directly to the Treatment model or will be routed through




the Storage Model first.  In either case the input to the Treatment model




will consist of a hydrograph of flow and pollutographs of BOD, suspended




solids, and total coliforms (most probable number) for each storm event




analyzed.  Additional pollutographs for other polluting constituents may




be added in the future when data become available.
                                   248

-------
The Treatment model is shown in Figure 15-1.  The input to the model will




be from storage (02) or directly from the sewer without storage (01).




(The numbers refer to treatment options in Figure 15-1.)   Immediately




following the start of the Treatment model an overflow is shown for flows




in excess of design capacity.  This overflow is combined with the treated




effluent, and the model computes both the quantity and quality of the




effluent discharged to the receiving waters.






The model includes all of the alternative processes considered applicable




at this time, and the engineer will have to select, for each particular




location, the process to be modeled.  For example, treatment by fine




screens followed by high rate filters and disinfection of the effluent




with bar racks and pumping ahead of treatment would be obtained by  the




selection of route 12-22-34-43-51-61-72 through the model.




Chlorine would be added ahead of the contact tank.  The quantity and




quality of inflow to and outflow leaving each level of treatment, as well




as the quantity and quality of the flow released to the receiving waters,




are computed for each time-step.  The Baker Street combined sewer overflow




facility in San Francisco  (EPA Project No.  11023 DXC), which  is one of




the catchment areas used for verification, would be modeled by selection




of route 12-21-32-41-51-61-71 with or without chemicals and/




or chlorine added ahead of the dissolved air flotation tank.






It will also be necessary for the engineer  to select  a design storm




event so that the model can select the number and size of units of  each




type required by the process selected.
                                   249

-------
NO STORAGE
PRECEDING
(BYPASS)
OVERFLOW
NONE
(BYPASS)
NONE
(BYPASS)
(
(BYPASS) (31)
DIS
Fl
INFLOW
1
T
STORAGE
(01) MODEL
PRECEDING
f
*
C START )

1
*
(H) BAR RACKS
i


,,n INLET
t21' PUMPING
*
|-» — CHEM
*
32) (FINE SCREENS)
(33)
i
SOLVED AIR (34) 	 t
.OTATION "" ISEDIM
I
J* — CHEM
(BYPASS) (41)
1
MICRO- U2, HIG
STRAINERS v ' FIL'
T
*
NONE
(BYRftSS)

NONE
(BYPASS)
T
/.,» EFFLUENT
l5" SCREENS
+

,T .
(61) OUTLET
PUMPING
*
«• — CHEM
NONE
(BYPASS)
,, f ,.
m, CONTACT
171 ' TANK
t
J
1
(02)
(12) LEVEL 1
(22) LEVEL 2
(35)
ENTATION [ LEVEL 3
T^

1(43)
H RATE LEV£L 4
FERS
""T
(52) LEVEL 5
(62) LEVEL 6
[72) LEVEL 7
                                  RECOMBINED OUTFLOW




NOTE:  Numbers in parentheses label treatment  options.







                    Figure 15-1.  TREATMENT MODEL
                                 250

-------
The design of the plant is based on combinations  of modules  of  specific




sizes, resulting in plants having the following maximum hydraulic




capacities in mgd:  5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35,  50,  75,  100,  125, 150,




200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, and 500.  The engineer will select the




percentage of the peak flow of the design event for which he wishes to




size the units (80 percent is suggested), and the model will automatically




size the plant for the next larger modular flow from the above list.




Alternatively, the engineer may select a design flow irrespective  of the




storm to be handled, and the model will design the plant for the modular




flow equal to or  (next) greater than the selected flow.  After the model




has computed the number and size of units, it can be used to compute the




operating performance for any storm or succession of storms in a given




study period.






The model will sum up the flow treated, the BOD, suspended  solids,  and




coliforms in the  influent and effluent of the complete  combination of




treatment processes, and the  removals in  each level of  treatment.   It




will compute the  treatment efficiency with and without  allowance  for




overflow quantities bypassing the  treatment units.   It  will also  compute




the construction  cost,  including  the  cost or value of the land required




and the  annual cost of  operation  and  maintenance.






PUMPING  STATIONS




The need for pumping  stations will depend on the topography and the




available head.   It is  assumed  that sufficient variable speed  pumps are




included in each  pumping  station  so that the rate of pumping will exactly




equal  the inflow rate.  The  inclusion or omission of a pumping station







                                    251

-------
 will therefore have no effect on the hydrograph and pollutographs  of  the




 flows to be treated.   The size of the pumping station necessary  to handle




 the design event,  the head,  and the quantity pumped must be  computed  so




 that the costs can be determined.






 THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT (Treatment Processes)
 The following discussion of the  various  treatment processes will  include




 the criteria adopted for selecting the number  and size  of  units,  and  the




 operating efficiency adopted for each  process,  together with  the  basis



 therefore.   (For the actual working of each model subroutine  see  the



 "User's  Manual."   For the cost figures incorporated  in  the model,  see



 Section  16. )






 Bar Racks (Treatment Option 12)




 It  was assumed that  bar  racks would be required in all  treatment  systems,




 except where sedimentation  occurring in  storage units is the  only or




 primary  treatment.   The  Treatment  model  handles the  latter process by




 selection of route 02  -  11  - 21  -  35 which may  be followed by filtration




 or  microstraining and  disinfection.






 It  was assumed  that bars would be  spaced from 1-inch clear opening to




 2-inches  on  centers, and  that the  racks would be  mechanically cleaned




with operation  initiated by a float switch.  There will be at least two




units in each installation, so that if one unit is undergoing maintenance!




at  least half of the flow capacity and probably somewhat more will be




available at all times.  Units will be sized for  a 3.0-fps velocity in




the approach channel at peak design flow and will be installed at a
                                   252

-------
slope of 1 horizontal on 2 vertical.   Channels will be  designed for



2-feet freeboard.  It was assumed that the  maximum size of  units would




be 8 feet submerged depth by 10 feet wide,  or a vertically  projected




submerged area of 80 square feet.  This results in a maximum capacity per




bar rack of 240 cfs.






The quantity of screenings removed is based on screenings removal  at




municipal sewage treatment plants.  Screenings removal varies from 0.1  to




5 cubic feet per million gallons  (Ref. 1),  but very few cities report




more than 2.5 cubic feet per million gallons.  For purposes of this




study, 2.0 cubic feet per million gallons has been taken as a liberal




average.  These are annual average results, and it is a well known fact




that the quantity of screenings increases greatly during storms,




especially for combined sewer systems.  It is not known whether the




proportion of screenings in the overflows will be as great as in the



intercepted flows, but to be on the safe side it has been assumed that




they will.  A factor of 3 has been used to allow for the greater quantity




of screenings in storm flows, or  6 cubic feet per million gallons.






If it is assumed that screenings weigh 50 pounds per cubic foot and  con-




tain 85 percent moisture, the dry solids removal amounts to  5.4 mg/L.




Solids of this type are generally excluded from samples subjected to




suspended solids analysis.  Nevertheless, in order  to  indicate  some




treatment effectiveness, 5.4 mg/L has been used for suspended solids




removal and 5 percent of that figure has been used  for BOD removal.
                                   253

-------
Fine Screens  (Treatment Options 33 and 34)




Fine screens, popular as an alternate to sedimentation tanks 50 years




ago and still in use in some locations such as Milwaukee, have slotted




holes varying from 3/64-inch to 1/8-inch wide by 2 inches long.  A num-




ber of manufacturers have been making rotary drum screens for industrial




processing, including the screening of industrial waste waters before




discharge.  These screens are similar to the well publicized microstrainer




but with a coarser wire mesh.  The screen wire normally available varies




from 6-mesh to 60-mesh.  The openings in the 60-mesh wire are .009 inch,




equivalent to 230 microns.  It is anticipated that fine screens of this




type could provide economical treatment of storm water overflows.  A




pilot plant (EPA Project No. 11023 FDC) containing such a screen with




50-mesh wire  (openings equal to 297 microns) has been operated on storm




overflows in Milwaukee in combination with a dissolved air flotation unit




(Ref. 2) and has provided significant data for both processes, individ-




ually and in combination.  The modeling of the fine screens is based




almost entirely on the data in Ref. 2.






The pilot plant (Ref. 2)  was operated at a hydraulic loading rate of




50 gpm per square foot and this rate has been adopted for sizing tne




units.   At least two units would be installed, with the total capacity




of all units equalling the design flow for the modular plant.






The removal of suspended solids by the screen in Ref. 2 varied from




24.9 +_ 9.8 percent during the summer and fall to 28.8 +_ 10.5 percent




in the spring.  The removal of BOD varied from 20.3 + 6.5 percent in the
                                  254

-------
summer and fall to 23.4 +_9.3 percent in the spring.  Sufficient data




are not available to correlate removal efficiency with storm water




quality.  Removal efficiency will undoubtedly vary with the size distri-




bution of solids, and hence possibly with the time of flow in the sewers.




For the present, the Treatment model assumes an average removal of 27




percent of the suspended solids and 22 percent of the BOD.  The backwash




rate has been assumed to be 0.75 percent of the flow.  This flow will be




pumped or will flow by gravity to a sanitary sewer or interceptor for




transportation to the sewage treatment plant.






Sedimentation (Treatment Option 35)




Sedimentation in sedimentation tanks or storage units is an obvious way




to improve the quality of sewer overflows.  The sizing of sedimentation




tanks and their treatment efficiency depends primarily on the overflow




rate.  Similarly, the treatment efficiency due to sedimentation in storage




units will depend primarily on the overflow rate, but the overflow rate




in this case will be based on the design of the basin as a storage unit




and not as a sedimentation tank.  Types of flow and pollutant increments




through larger storage units are discussed in Section 9.






Primary sedimentation tanks in municipal sewage treatment plants were




formerly designed for detention periods of one to two hours, but if the




depth is fixed, the overflow rate is also fixed.  Regulatory agencies




now limit overflow rates to 600 gpsf per day for small plants  (less than




1.0 mgd), but permit up to 1,000 gpsf per day for larger plants where




the tanks are followed by secondary treatment units.  Since the maximum




flow at sewage treatment plants normally varies from 1.5 to 2.0 times the
                                   255

-------
average design flow and may be as high as 2.5 to 3.0 times the average



design flow, especially at small plants, it is logical to increase the



overflow rate for tanks designed on a peak flow basis.  The Treatment


model provides for selection of the overflow rate by the engineer.  An



overflow rate of 800 times 2, or 1,600 gpsf per day is suggested.  An



average tank water depth of 8 feet is assumed.




The removal of suspended solids decreases as overflow rates increase



(Ref. 1, p. 93) and as detention periods decrease (Ref. 3, p. 338, and



Ref. 4, p. 610).  It is also evident from Ref. 3 that the removal



efficiency increases as the strength of the sewage increases.




The data in Tables 9, 10, and 11 of Ref. 1 were plotted with percent



removal of suspended solids as ordinates versus overflow rates as



abscissas.  Figure 15-2 is a plot of only those tanks with influent



suspended solids concentration between 100 and 200 ppm.  The average



removal is given by the following equation:
                                     >,«/      -300.
                    Removal = .70 - .40(	^	
where  OVFRA  =  Overflow rate in gpm/sq ft/day




If the percentage removals for more concentrated sewages are plotted on



similar diagrams, the average removal curves are displaced upward



parallel to the line on Figure 15-2.  The additional removal amounts to:
            (S5 cone. - 140} x ^ Qr S3 conc.^x  .06 _  ^           (2)
                                   256

-------
   .90
   .80
   .70
   .60
CO
CO


U.  .50
UJ
cc
  .40
  .30
  .20
  .10




\
Ui
"1
0
I-
§
Ul
0.
o
°z
2

o

°0

\
o







CO







^-ASSUMED MAX REMOVAL
/ 0


O
\ ^-R
\
O


O
o




o







:MOVAL= .7<
(KM
INI
V
\^
N.
O^v




O


o







)-.40(OVFF
2,0
>-200 PPW
rLUENT )




\











tA- 300)
DO
SS IN 	
^SUGGESTED
^ OVERFLOW RATE
FOR DESIGN
FLOW (MAX)

\
\




O
\
\
^ASSUMED
MIN 1


REMOVAL


     0       500    1,000     1,500    ^000    2,500

        OVERFLOW  RATE  (GPM/SQ FT/DAY)
 Figure  15-2.   TREATMENT OF OVERFLOWS BY  SEDIMEN-

                TATION TANKS
                        257

-------
When Eq. 2 is combined with Eq. 1 the formula for removal of suspended


solids becomes:
                        SS cone. X .06    ^,QVFRA - 3QOt             ...
      Removal = 0.656 + - — -- .40( - 2~0(}0 -



Eq. 3 has been incorporated into the model for the determination of sus-


pended solids with the following limitations:  the overflow rate will be


assumed to be at least 300, and the removal efficiency will be not less


than 0.30 nor more than 0.76.  It is assumed that scour of already


deposited solids will not be a problem.




The percentage of BOD removed is assumed to be 0.55 times the removal of


suspended solids.  Inspection of the BOD removal data in Tables 9, 10,


and 11 of Reft 1 and on p. 610 of Ref. 4 substantiates this assumption.


If chlorine is applied ahead of the sedimentation tanks, the removal of


BOD will be increased.  It has been assumed that the increase will amount


to 20 percent, resulting in a BOD removal of 0.66 times the suspended


solids removal .




The sludge volume removed has been based on a solids content of 5 percent,


and also on a minimum sludge pumping rate of 45 gpm (0.1 cfs) .  The


sludge is assumed to be pumped continuously to a sanitary sewer or inter-


ceptor for transport to the sewage treatment plant.




The efficiency of the sedimentation tanks has been based on the efficiency


of similar tanks in municipal sewage treatment practice.  Somewhat differ-


ent results may be obtained from sedimentation tanks installed at the


outlet of storm drains, especially where soil erosion is a factor.
                                   258

-------
For combined sewers where soil erosion is not a factor,  the data used




appear to be applicable without further adjustment.






Dissolved Air Flotation (Treatment Option 32)




A dissolved air flotation plant is under construction on the Baker Street




outfall into San Francisco Bay.  When operating data from this facility




become available, the following determination of the treatment efficiency




of dissolved air flotation units should be reviewed and revised if neces-




sary.  The plans and specifications as well as the engineers' preliminary




reports for this project were made available for this study.  The facility




is designed to handle 15 percent of the peak flow from a five-year storm,




or a runoff rate of 0.20 inches per hour at an overflow rate, not




including a recycle flow of 4,050 gpsf per day.  The flotation tanks




will be preceded by mechanically cleaned bar racks, and excess flows




will be bypassed.  Facilities will be installed for the addition of



chemical coagulants and chlorine.






The data in Ref. 2 for the combined operation of fine screens and dissol-




ved air flotation has also been useful.  Based on Ref. 2, the fine screens




removed 27 percent of the suspended solids and the dissolved air flotation




process removed 33 percent of what was left, for an overall removal of




51 percent.  Since the dissolved air flotation tank would contain sludge




removal equipment as well as scum removal equipment, it was assumed that




the same percentage of removal would be obtained without the fine screens




at the cost of somewhat more air and possibly a slightly greater recycle




rate.  This efficiency was attained in the pilot plant at an overflow




rate of 3 gpm per square foot  (4,320 gpsf per day) with no recycle.







                                   259

-------
(A portion of the effluent from the fine screens was pressurized instead




of recycled flotation tank effluent.  Recycling may be more practical in




a full size plant.)   No tests were made at other overflow rates but




additional tests at higher rates of flow are contemplated.






The model allows the engineer to select the overflow rate based on design




flow plus recirculation, the percent of recycle flow, and the tank depth.




An overflow rate of 5,000 gpsf per day, 15 percent recycle, and a tank




depth of 10 feet are suggested for normal design.






It was assumed that the removal efficiency would be comparable to the




removal efficiency of plain sedimentation tanks, but that this efficiency




would be obtained at higher overflow rates due to the rapid rise of the




air bubbles.  Since the 51 percent removal reported for the pilot plant




of Ref. 2 at an overflow rate of 4,320 gpsf per day is obtained (in




plain sedimentation tanks treating 100-200 ppm suspended solids at an




overflow rate of 1,250 gpsf per day), we have used the percentage




removals for plain sedimentation, but for overflow rates equal to




4,320/1,250, or 3.5 times the rates for plain sedimentation.  This leads




to the following equation for the removal of suspended solids:
     Removal = 0.656 + SS <*** '°6 - .40(          ')            (4)
In using Eq. 4 and the following modifications a minimum overflow rate




of 1,000 gpsf per day is assumed by the model.






The addition of chemicals increased the overall removal of suspended




solids from 51 percent to 68.3 percent (Ref. 2).  The actual removal
                                   260

-------
can be expected to decrease as the overflow rate increases,   To  allow




for this factor, the increased removal due to chemicals was  assumed to be
                          n 20 -  OVFRA x *
                          °'20
                                    10,000





or 15 percent at an overflow rate of 5,000 gpsf per day.   This can be




simplified to






                             20,000 - OVFRA                          .,.

                            (   100,000    ;





and this term has been added to the removal equation when chemicals are




added.  The complete equation becomes






__RPMV _  „-,   .06 x SSINF       OVFRA - 1,000   Trnr,1f 20,000 - OVFRA
SSREMV - .656 +     ~ -- .40( - ^-^ - )+ ICHEM(    100/000   )


                                                                     (7)




where  SSREMV  =  Suspended solids removed



       SSINF   =  Suspended solids in inflow



       ICHEM   =  0 if no chemicals are added



       ICHEM   =  1 if chemicals are added






The amount of chemicals added is computed at 12 mg/L, based on Ref .  2.



Regardless of the equations the model will restrict the removal of



suspended solids to not less than 0.20 and not more than 0.82.






The reported results in Ref. 2 indicate a BOD removal without the




addition of chemicals of approximately 90 percent of the suspended solids



removal.  If chemicals are added the increase is only 2 percent.  The



chemicals would have little effect on the soluble BOD.  If chlorine  is




added about 2 ppm of BOD is eliminated per 1 ppm of chlorine used up.






                                   261

-------
 It is assumed that this will amount to an average increase in BOD removal




 of 15 percent.  Adopting the above as the basis for BOD removal; the




 following equation is obtained:
  BODREM = .59 4- '°5           ' - . 36 (') + ICHEM x .02
           ICL2 x .15                                                (8)
where  ICHEM  and ICL2  equal 1 or 0, depending on whether or not




chemicals and/or chlorine are added.  In order to keep the percentage




removals of BOD within practical limits for all contingencies, the




model restricts the BOD removal (BODREM) to not less than 0.18 and not




more than 0.60.






The amount of chlorine used is taken at 10 mg/L if the BOD of the influent




is 130 or less, and at 15 mg/L if it is more.






The volume of sludge and scum is taken equal to 1.5 percent of the flow




(Ref . 2) .  This will be pumped to a sanitary sewer or interceptor for




transport to the sewage treatment plant.






The detention time in the flotation tank will be computed and if it is




less than 15 minutes it will be used in subroutine KILL to compute the




removal of coliforms.  (See Chlorination discussion.)









Dissolved Air Flotation Preceded by Fine Screens (Treatment Option 33)




For the combination of fine screens followed by dissolved air flotation




it has been assumed that the fine screens would perform exactly as des-




cribed earlier, i.e., they would remove 27 percent of the suspended
                                    262

-------
solids and 22 percent of the BOD,  regardless of the flow rate or  concen-




tration of pollutants.






Since tests of this combination of processes in Ref. 2 were used  to es-




tablish the performance of dissolved air flotation alone at an  overflow




rate of 4,320 gpsf per day, it follows that the overall efficiency of




removal predicted by the model should be the same in treatment option 33




with fine screens as in treatment option 32 without fine screens  at an




overflow rate of 4,320 gpsf per day.  However, since part of the  suspen-




ded solids and BOD has been removed by the  fine screens, a different




removal efficiency must be applied to the fine screen effluent.  No test




results of the combination at other overflow rates  are available, but it




is reasonable to assume that the overall results of the combination would




vary with the overflow rate in about the same manner as for dissolved air




flotation alone.  Accordingly, the equations for suspended solids and




BOD removal for dissolved air flotation alone were  adjusted to give




approximately the same overall removals at  overflow rates of 1,000 and




4,320 gpsf per day, when combined with the  removals by  the fine  screens.




To obtain comparable  removal efficiencies it was also necessary  to limit




the minimum overflow  rate to 1,000 gpsf per day as  before, and to impose




reasonable limits on  the maximum and minimum values of  suspended solids




and BOD removal whether or not chemicals and/or chlorine are added.
                                    263

-------
The resulting equations, to be applied to the effluent from the fine

screens, are as follows:


    SSPEMV = 0.528 + SS ""^ '°6 - 0.486 (OWR^'000) +
                                                                     (9)
           . 0.475 + .         cone.
                                                                    (10)
             ICHEM x 1.30 x 0.02 + ICL2 x 1.30 x 0.15
where  ICHEM  =  1 if chemicals are applied and 0 if chemicals are not

                 applied

       ICL2   =  1 if chlorine is applied and 0 if chlorine is not

                 applied

Regardless of the above equations, the model will limit the suspended

solids removal to not more than 75 percent and not less than 15 percent,

and the BOD removal to not more than 48 percent and not less than 15

percent.

In comparing the performance of dissolved air flotation tanks with and

without fine screens ahead of them, different overflow rates and recir-

culation rates may be assumed for the two cases.

Micros trainers (Treatment Option 42)

A micros trained consists of a rotating drum covered with screen cloth

operating partly submerged in a concrete tank.  The water enters one

end of the drum and flows outward through the screen cloth.  As the drum
                                   264

-------
revolves the solids caught on the inside  of the  cloth  are  carried  to the




top of the drum where they are washed into a trough by high pressure jets




of strained effluent and discharged to waste. Microstrainer  screen cloth




comes in three mesh sizes, designated Mark 0, I, and II with  effective




aperture sizes of 23, 35, and 60 microns.  Developed originally in




England for straining algae out of water supplies, microstrainers  have




been used in England for polishing sewage treatment plant effluents




since 1950  (Ref. 5), and have recently been undergoing tests  in this




country to determine their suitability as tertiary treatment units on




activated sludge effluents at Lebanon, Ohio  (Ref. 6),  and Chicago




(Ref. 7).






Under a contract with the EPA  a  microstrainer with a  diameter  of  5




feet and a length of 3 feet was  installed on the overflow of a combined




sewer serving the 11.2-acre Callowhill residential area in Philadelphia.




Preliminary data are contained in Ref. 8.  This filter had a submerged




area of about 30 square feet, and the individual capacities of the pumps




supplying the filter were 5,000  and 12,000 gph  for a  combined  capacity




of 17,000 gph or 284 gpm, roughly equivalent to 9.5 gpm per square foot




of submerged area.  Initial tests were made with Mark I cloth, but




Mark 0 cloth was substituted after six months resulting in greatly




improved efficiencies.  No difficulties  due  to plugging of the screen




were experienced with either cloth.






At Lebanon, a microstrainer with a diameter  of  5  feet and a length of




1 foot was operated on activated sludge  effluent  for  a period  of  five




months.  Capacity at a 6-inch head loss  was  3.8 gpm per square foot of
                                    265

-------
total area for the Mark 0 cloth and 4.5 gpm per square foot for the




Mark I.  These are based on a filterability index,  I = 17.0,    for




both cloths corresponding to a suspended solids concentration of 25 mg/L




in the influent for the Mark 0 cloth and 35 mg/L for the Mark I.  The




peripheral speed of the drum was 50 fpm.






At the Hanover plant of the Metropolitan Sanitary District of Greater




Chicago  (Ref. 7), a full size microstrainer with a diameter of 10 feet




and a length of 10 feet was installed with Mark 0 cloth.  This unit was




built for a maximum head loss of 6 inches and a hydraulic loading of




6.6 gpm per square foot of total screen area equivalent to about 10 gpm




per square foot of submerged area.  The maximum solids loading of secon-




dary effluent handled by the microstrainer was 0.88 psf per day equivalent




to 11.1 ppm at the maximum flow of 6.6 gpm per square foot.  On the




other hand, the unit was able to handle a synthetic mixture of effluent,




fortified with activated sludge at a rate of 3.8 psf per day, which  is




6.8 gpm per square foot at 50 ppm solids concentration.  This type of solids




will filter much more readily than the pinpoint type of floe typical of




secondary effluents.  This fact must be kept in mind in applying the




Callowhill results generally to the treatment of storm water overflows.






There are at least four manufacturers of this type of equipment using




screen cloth with apertures of about 25 microns.  The term "Microstrainer"




is the copyrighted  trade name of  the Glenfield  and Kennedy Division  of



the Crane Company.  A scanning of the hydraulic capacities quoted in the




trade literature yields figures varying from 4.6 to 28 gpm per square




foot of total area,  equivalent to 8 to 45 gpm per square foot of
                                    266

-------
submerged area.  Head losses range up to 30 inches,  with 6  to 12  inches




recommended.  All literature contains statements to the effect that the




capacity of the unit depends on the type of media (screen cloth)  used,




and the concentration and characteristics of the solids to be removed.






In sharp contrast to the Chicago and Lebanon data, the Callowhill results




indicate that the microstrainer with Mark 0 cloth successfully handled




suspended solids concentrations varying from 21 to 498 ppm and averaging




169 ppm.  The peak flows and high concentrations were of short duration




and the flows were not given.  However, it was found possible to increase




the flow per square foot fivefold by blanking off 80 percent of the area,




thus increasing the differential head up to 30 inches.  The actual flow




rates for this condition were not given, but if both pumps were used, a




flow rate of 47.5 gpm would have been possible.  The explanation for the




great difference in these results and those in Chicago  and Lebanon would




appear to be in the character of the suspended solids.  For  an area as




small as 11 acres, the sewage would undoubtedly be  fresh and would con-




sist of discrete particles  that had not had time  to disintegrate.  This




would not be the case with  large  areas  for which  an adjustment factor is




included in the model.






The above contrasts have made  the  sizing and performance estimates for




the microstrainers difficult.  The Callowhill  data have been relied




upon primarily but theoretical computations based on Chicago and Lebanon




and other data have been used  as  a check.   From Ref. 7 it was learned




that  the suspended solids  removed would plot as a straight line  versus




the suspended  solids  in the influent.   These data for Mark 0 cloth from
                                    267

-------
Table 1 of Ref. 8 have been plotted on Figure 15-3.  The straight line,




drawn -by eye, has the equation






                               y = x - 35                           (11)






where  y  =  Suspended solids removed .(ppm)




       x  =  Suspended solids in influent  (ppm)






Since this equation would yield zero removal for influent suspended




solids less than 35 ppm, it was restricted to suspended solids equal to




or greater than 70 ppm.  A parabolic curve having the equation
was inserted between the origin and x = 70.  Eqs. 11 and 12 are incor-




porated in the Treatment model for determining the suspended solids




removal of the flow through the screen cloth.  They give no hint as to




the capacity of the unit.






For determining capacity, other considerations were necessary.  First,




for economical reasons, as large a capacity as possible was desired,




say 40 gpm per square foot of submerged area.  This is about half the




capacity of the 50 gpm per square foot of total area used for sizing the




fine screens.  It is four times the capacity of the Chicago unit and six




times the capacity of the Lebanon unit, and approaches the maximum




pumping rate possible at the Callowhill unit with the screen area reduced




80 percent.  It was realized that this unit would have to be designed




for a 30-inch differential head.  It was also anticipated that the




capacity might be reduced at high solids concentration with part of the






                                   268

-------
  Q
  LLJ
  LJ
  o:

  CO
  CO
*J\J\J
Af\f\
*HJw

"v^n
\j\j\j


200






inn
i \j\j


Q




CM O
x ^-
*•
"
o
UJ
m
1
O
m
<
oa
x/»
V y^~
^7
~*^r /










O
°X
/
y
/
x. /* o
/°





y
./ 0
^r










/
/
/
/
/










X =70
/
"/
	 -STRAIGHT
>
' LINE,
SLOPE = 1.0
EQ: Y=X-35













1 	 JCT OF 2 EQUATIONS'- Y = 35




SLOPE = 1.0

















0 IOO 2OO 300 4OO 5OO 6C
                          SS  IN  INFLUENT (MG/L)
           LEGEND


    6-15-69  TO 7-23-69

O   CONTROL CHANGE - MAX  DIFFERENTIAL INCREASED
    7-28-69  TO 8-4-69

X   FILTER  AREA REDUCED 80%  9-3-69
      Figure 15-3.
MICROSTRAINER AT CALLOWHILL (PHILADELPHIA),

J!4ARK O  SCREEN CLOTH
                                  269

-------
flow bypassing the unit.  The throughput of the unit should therefore be




made dependent on the solids concentration and also a factor denoting




the composition and condition of the solids.






The head loss through the microstrainer is  given  by the following equation:
                             H -- - -                          (13)






where  H       =  Head loss  (in.)




       Q       =  Constant total flow rate (gpm)




       C_      =  Initial (clean) strainer resistence  (ft as measured




                  in filterability test)




       A       =  Effective submerged area (sq ft)




       S       =  Speed of strainer in effective fabric area entering




                  water (sq ft/min)




       I       =  Filterability index




       m and n =  Constants with values dependent on the units used




                  (for the above units,  m  =  0.0267 and  n  =  0.1337)






It will be seen from Eq. 13 that the head loss is not a simple function




of Q, that it increases as the filterability index increases, and that




it decreases as the speed of rotation increases (S increasing) .






Based on the Lebanon data (Ref. 6) and its filterability index,  I = 17.0,




the flow was computed at various heads as a ratio to the flow  Q   at a




head loss of 6 inches.  Then the index was reduced successively to 10,




5, 3, and 1 and the flow was computed at various head losses.  The results




are shown on Figure 15-4.  The filterability is the reciprocal of the






                                   270

-------
                          BASIS:  SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT EFFLUENT
                                 LEBANON, OHIO, 5 FT  DIAM x I FT LONG TEST UNIT
                                 Q, = 58 GPM —•• 58/9 = 6.45 GPM/SQ FT OF SUBMERGED AREA
                                    PERIPHERAL SPEED = SO FPM
                                 S =44.5 SQ FT/MIN
to
                                                               PROPOSED MICROSTRAINER RATING
                                                               40 GPM AT 30 IN. HEAD LOSS
                                                               EQUIV.  I = 2.43
                                                   LEBANON, OHIO
                                                   RATING  POINT
I = FILTERABILITY INDEX
                                               HANOVER PARK
                                               RATING  POINT
                                Z           4          6           8           10
                                    Q2/Q|   (Q|=6.45 GPM/SQ FT  OF SUBMERGED  AREA)
                                 Figure 15-4.  MICROSTRAINER CAPACITY, MARK 0 SCREEN  CLOTH

-------
 filterability index, and it will be noted that as  I  decreases, the




 advantage of operation at greater heads increases.  The proposed oper-




 ating point for the Treatment model and for Chicago and Lebanon plants




 is shown.






 Figure 15-5 shows the capacity at a 30-inch head versus the filterability




 index I and versus the filterability I/I.  The following equation has




 been fitted to these curves:






                                    169                              (14)
                                  y + 1.8





where  x  =  Capacity  (gpm/sq ft submerged area)




       y  =  Filterability index, I






Eq. 14 gives  I = 2.43  for the proposed rating point.  Since there were




no known measurements of I on storm overflows there was no direct method




of checking this figure.  It is included for comparison with test results




which undoubtedly will become available in the future.






A millipore filter with a pore size of 8.0 microns has a capacity to




filter 37 gpm per square foot of clean water at 25°C and at 30-inch head




loss, which is almost double the capacity of the next smaller pore size




filter (5.0 microns).  This would appear to indicate that 40 gpm per




square foot is attainable as a reasonable maximum.






The maximum solids concentration compatible with a capacity of 40 gpm




per square foot was estimated in the following manner.  At Hanover Park




in Chicago the maximum solids loading of the applied effluent was 0.88




psf of total area per day, of which 65 percent was removed on the average.







                                   272

-------
                      FILTERABILITY =1/1
                     FILTERABILITY INDEX  T_
FITTED EQUATION:
                       169
                     Y -»- 1.8
WHERE
       X  s  CAPACITY
       Y  s  I
Figure  15-5.   MICROSTRAINER CAPACITY AT 30-INCH HEAD LOSS,
               MARK 0 SCREEN CLOTH
                             273

-------
 This amount-s  to  0.000092 psf per  revolution.  However, as noted earlier,




 the microstrainer handled a synthetic mixture of effluent fortified with




 activated sludge at a  rate of  3.8 psf per day.  Using this figure as




 more representative of the solids in storm water overflows and assuming




 65  percent  removal  as  above, the  solids accumulation becomes 0.0004 psf




 per revolution.  Assuming 1 percent solids in the sludge film, the




 thickness of  the mat equals 0.0077 inch.  Now, if it is assumed that




 the solids  in storm overflows  consist of 10 percent organics and 90 per-




 cent silt,  and that the 10 percent organics constitute a sludge with




 96  percent  moisture content filling the pores of the silt, the mixture




 has a specific gravity of 1.15 of which 29.4 percent is dry solids.  The




 same thickness of mat, 0.0077  inch, of this material would contain




 0.0135 pounds of suspended solids per square foot per revolution.




 Microstrainers are  assumed to have a capacity of either 5.0 mgd each for




 the smaller plants  or  12.5 mgd each for the larger modular plants.  At




 40  gpm per  square foot of submerged area,  (12.5 x 695)/40  or 217




 square feet are  required, equal to 69 percent of the total area of a




microstrainer with  a diameter of 10 feet and a length of 10 feet.  At




 4.3  rpm, 40 gpm per square foot of submerged area, and 69 percent sub-




mergence, 0.0135 pound of solids per square foot per revolution is




equivalent to a  removal of 252 mg/L.   Multiplying this by 40 gpm per




square foot gives 10,100, or say 10,000, as the product of gpm per




square foot and suspended solids removal in mg/L.   From this, the follow-




ing equation for the capacity of the  unit in terms of the removal of
                                  274

-------
suspended solids in mg/L is obtained:



                                           10,000 x F
             gpm/sq ft submerged area = ss removal in mg/L




When the inflow suspended solids equals 287 ppm, Eq. 15, combined with


the removal efficiency, gives a capacity of 40 gpm per square foot for


F = 1.0.  The model restricts the flow rate to not over 40 gpm per square


foot of submerged area regardless of the solids concentration.  If the


solids concentration is so great that all the flow cannot be strained,


part is bypassed and the overall performance is computed by the model.




F is introduced into Eq. 15 to allow for the effect of comminution and


disintegration of the solids due to time of flow in the sewers.  It has


a maximum value of 1.0.  The following is suggested for the value of F,


subject to future pilot plant verification on large drainage basins,


and is incorporated in the model:
                              V
                                      400                           (16)
                                 area in acres




The value of F is suggested on the basis that no reduction" would be


necessary until the drainage basin exceeded 400 acres, and that then the


reduction would be in proportion to the time of flow assumed proportional


to the square root of the area.




The rate of backwash at Lebanon and at Chicago was 2.5 to 3.0 percent of


the smaller flows treated, or approximately 50 gpm for a full size unit.


It has been assumed that no greater quantity of wash water would be


required, since this amounts to 5 gpm per linear foot of filter.
                                    275

-------
The backwash water rate has been rounded off to a constant flow of 0.1

cfs per microstrainer which will be pumped or will flow by gravity to

a sanitary sewer or interceptor for transport to the sewage treatment

plant.


With the operating performance determined on the basis of suspended

solids, the remaining task was to compute the BOD removals.  At Hanover

Park, BOD removals were as good or even better than suspended solids

removals, and at Lebanon they were about 90 percent of the suspended

solids removal.  On the other hand, the removals at Callowhill were

erratic; many negative values were obtained.  This may have been due to

disintegration of the solids during pumping.  The BOD removals at Callow-

hill cannot be used as a basis for the model.


On the other hand, excellent data were obtained at Callowhill on the

removal of volatile suspended solids.  BOD versus volatile suspended

solids were plotted in the storm flows of the Laguna Street sewer in

San Francisco for the storms of March 10 and March 15, 1967, reported

by Engineering-Science (Ref. 9).  The BOD was found to equal 80 percent

of the volatile suspended solids.  The removals of volatile suspended

solids versus the volatile suspended solids in the influent were plotted

as given in Table 3 of Ref. 8.  The straight line equations obtained

were multiplied by 0.8 to convert to BOD.  The following equations were

obtained and incorporated in the model:
 BOD removed  (ppm)  =  BOD in  influent  (ppm)  -  10.0,  if the BOD in the
                                                                     (17)
                     influent  is  equal to or  greater than 27 ppm
                                   276

-------
  BOD removed (ppm)  = 17.0 x BOD in influent (ppm)/27.0,  if the  BOD
                                                                    (18)
                      in the influent is less than 27 ppm
Due to the form of Eqs. 11, 12, 17, and 18, there would be no improve-

ment in the suspended solids and BOD concentrations in the effluent from

the microstrainers if the flow is given primary treatment in Level 3

unless the suspended solids and BOD concentrations in the influent to

the microstrainers were reduced below 70 and 27 mg/L, respectively.

However, in the case of heavy concentrations of suspended solids or large

drainage basins, primary treatment in Level 3 could eliminate or greatly

reduce the amount of flow bypassing the units, thus resulting in consid-

erable overall improvement of the effluent.


High Rate Filters (Treatment Option 43)

Various types of rapid filters are being investigated for tertiary

treatment of sewage plant effluents and for the treatment of overflows

from storm and combined sewers.  At Hanover Park in Chicago  (Ref. 7) two

Hardinge automatic backwash filters were installed to test their appli-

cability for treating activated sludge plant effluent.  They were oper-

ated in parallel with the microstrainer.  Each filter contained 11 inches

of sand, with an effective size of 0.58 millimeters and a uniformity

coefficient of 1.62, supported on porous plates.  These filters were

operated with and without chemicals at a capacity of 2.5 gpm per square

foot for a low head of 4.4 inches and at a capacity of 6 gpm per square

foot for a high head of 11.5 inches.  Suspended solids removals varied

from 65 to 78 percent.  The maximum solids removal at the higher rate
                                   277

-------
was 0.65 psf per day equivalent to 9 ppm.  The backwashing cycle takes




30 minutes to clean the whole bed, a narrow strip at a time.






For economical treatment of sewer overflows, considerably higher flow




rates are desirable.  Higher rates will require higher operating heads




and coarser media.  To obtain good efficiencies and large solids holding




capacity, multiple media filters with a greater overall depth will




probably be required.  If the automatic backwash filter can be modified




along the above lines to triple its capacity while maintaining good




efficiency, it would be an ideal unit for this service.






In Washington, D.C., (Ref. 10) a synthetic storm overflow wastewater,




developed by diluting domestic sewage and adding clays and silts to




provide a waste comparable to combined sewer overflows analyzed at the




time, was filtered through three laboratory filters.  Each filter con-




sisted of a 9-foot jointed glass pipe with an inside diameter of 4 inches.




One filter contained fiber glass.  A second filter contained 36 inches of




anthracite, 24 inches of a garnet sand mixture, and 3 inches of coarse




garnet supported on 9 inches of gravel.  The third filter consisted of




48 inches of medium garnet and 9 inches of coarse garnet supported on




9 inches of gravel.  It was designed and operated as an upflow filter,




and performed reasonably well at flow rates between 5 and 15 gpm per




square foot with suspended solids removals of 60 percent and BOD removals




of 45 percent.  At filtration rates exceeding 15 gpm per square foot the




efficiency dropped sharply, as would be expected for this type of



filter.
                                   278

-------
The second tri-media filter was operated as a downflow filter  at  a  rate




of 10 gpm per square foot.  Runs lasted two hours with suspended  solids




removals of 80 to 95 percent and BOD removals of 50 to 80 percent.  The




higher rates were obtained with chemical additions, 150 mg/L of alum




and 4 mg/L of flocculant aid.  The same efficiencies were maintained  at




rates up to 20 gpm per square foot, but filter runs were shortened  to




one-half hour.






The fiber glass filter performed remarkably well at rates between 15  and




50 gpm per square foot with suspended solids removals in the range of 87




to 95 percent and BOD removals ranging from 60 to 75 percent;  however,




severe backwash problems were encountered.  Runs lasted from one-half to




one hour with 750 to 1,000 mg/L of suspended solids in the influent.




Further tests of this filter should be made in a pilot plant of adequate




size to determine design criteria and plant scale operating performance.




Until such data are available, design estimates should be based on more




conventional units, similar to the tri-media filter.






Pending further tests of the applicability of high rate filters to the




treatment of storm and combined sewer overflows, a flexible program has




been developed which will permit the engineer to select the following




filter parameters:




     1.  Maximum flow rate, gpm per square foot




     2.  Maximum head loss




     3.  Holding capacity, pounds of dry solids per square foot at




         maximum rate and maximum head loss.
                                   279

-------
 Initial values of these parameters are suggested in the following dis-



 cussion and have been incorporated in the model.





 Based on the tri-media filter described above, a design capacity of not



 more than 20 gpm per square foot and preferably less should be selected



 for sizing the units at the design flow.  Each installation will contain



 an even number of units, not less than four.  This will permit taking



 a unit out of service for backwashing.  Maximum size of filter units



 will be 1,400 square feet, each with a maximum capacity of 40 mgd or



 62 cfs.





 A maximum head loss not greater than 10 feet is suggested.





 Assuming that the water applied to the tri-media filter contained 750



 mg/L of suspended solids of which 80 percent were removed and that a



 half-hour run at 20 gpm per square foot was feasible before backwashing,



 the solids removed by the filter amounted to:
       20 JffiS- x 30 min x 750 =3. x 0.80 x ^  ***' = 3.0 psf    (19)
          sq ft                L           . .6    mg/L
It is suggested that this value or a lesser figure be taken as the



holding capacity of the filter.





The suspended solids removal of the ripened filters has been taken at 80



percent without chemicals and 95 percent if coagulating chemicals are



used.  The BOD removal has been taken at 50 percent without chemicals



and 80 percent with chemical additions.  These removals are based on Ref. 10.
                                   280

-------
To allow for reduced efficiencies of clean filters,  both efficiencies




have been reduced by one-half when filters are first placed in service,




and are allowed to increase uniformly with the pounds of suspended solids




removed until 5 percent of the filter holding capacity has been accumu-




lated, at which point the full efficiencies stated above are attained.




Chemicals, if used, are computed at the rate of 150 mg/L of alum and




4 mg/L of flocculant aid based on Ref . 10.






Head losses will undoubtedly be high when operating at high rates such




as these.  For 24 inches of granular media with an effective size of




1.0 millimeters, the head losses at 68°P computed by Rose's method as




given by Fair and Geyer (Ref. 4) are as follows:






             Gpm/sq ft                       Head Loss, ft




                  5                               0.89




                 10                               1.97




                 20                               4.58






These losses do not include losses in the underdrain system which could




be substantial.  The head loss above varies approximately as the 1.18




power of the flow, and, on the basis of the above figures, it has been




assumed that the head loss through a clean filter would be 40 percent of




the maximum head at the design rate.  At other rates of flow the head




loss through a clean -filter is given by the following equation :
                      "clean"  ^/V     * '4° Hm                   <20>
                                   281

-------
The head loss due to filter clogging is assumed to vary directly with



the rate of flow and the solids accumulation:
            Head loss due to clogging = -^— x - — x (.60 H )          (21)
                                        gm    Sqm         m




where  S    =  Integrated sum of the solids removed in each time-step (psf)



       Sqm  =  Solids holding capacity of the filter






The total head loss is equal to the sum of the head loss clean and the



head loss due to clogging.  When the total head with one unit out of



service reaches 90 percent of the maximum head, the backwashing cycle



is initiated and the filters are washed in rotation.  This will allow



for some head build-up on the last filters to be washed.






The backwashing of each filter, including taking out of service and



placing back in service, is assumed to last one 10-minute time-step and



to require an average backwash flow of 15 gpm per square foot over the



10 minutes.  The backwash water will be discharged by gravity or pumped



to a sanitary sewer or interceptor for transport to the sewage treatment



plant.





When the first filter washed is placed back in service, integration of



the solids accumulated on the  filter begins anew.  Efficiency of the



clean filter is assumed to be  reduced 50 percent for  the  first time-step;



full efficiency is assumed for subsequent  time-steps.   The head loss on



the first filter washed is allowed to reach maximum head, HM, the second



time around before the washing cycle is again  initiated, because each



of the other filters will have been in operation a shorter length of




time since they were cleaned.





                                   282

-------
WARNING;  Later information in regard to the laboratory tests  in Ref.  10,




on which the program is based, indicates that the head loss was  allowed




to build up to 15 psi in roost runs under which conditions the  solids




removed from the wastes were so compacted into the filter media  that




backwashing was time-consuming and difficult.  It cannot be too  strongly




emphasized that the filter performance contained in the model  has not




been substantiated and remains purely speculative.  There is no  assurance




that the filters will not plug up and overflow at design rates if solids




concentrations are high.  The model does not warn of or allow  for this




situation.  High rate filters should not be proposed without pretreatment




in Level 3.  To do so is contrary to all experience with granular filters




in the waterworks field.






Effluent Screens  (Treatment Option 52)




Effluent screens are included for aesthetic improvement of overflows




discharged at the shoreline or for treatment processes not including




fine screening or filtering processes.  No significant improvement in




suspended solids or BOD can be computed for such installations.






Effluent screens were installed at the Rockaway high rate activated




sludge plant of New York City to eliminate all traces of visible sewage




solids which might pass through the plant and be discharged at  the seawall.




In many cases the aesthetic and psychological benefits, admittedly dif-




ficult  to estimate, could be well worth the  cost,  especially  if the




installation of effluent screens made unnecessary  the installation of




more costly equipment.  They  are included in the Treatment model so that




their cost can be estimated.
                                    283

-------
It is assumed that screens would be of the waterworks travelling basket




type with 6-mesh wire.  Two or more screens would be installed.  They




would have a capacity of 450 gpm per square foot based on the design




flow.  Assuming a maximum submerged area for each screen of 100 square




feet, the maximum capacity per unit would be 100 cfs.






The volume of screenings removed is estimated at 0.05 cubic feet per




million gallons.  These would be removed by truck and disposed of in a




sanitary landfill or at the municipal incinerator.






Chlorination (Treatment Option 72)




Disinfection of storm and combined sewer overflows can be justified as




a public health measure to protect downstream water supplies, bathing




beaches, and other water uses.  Chlorination is the most widely used




method of disinfection and is the only method included in the Treatment




model.  While the decision whether or not to chlorinate will be based




entirely on the need for disinfection, the addition of chlorine will




result in an incidental reduction of BOD.  Hence the Treatment model




computes the reduction in both BOD and.coliform organisms due to chlori-




nation.  Chlorination has no effect on suspended solids removals.  The




engineer must select the point of chlorine injection.  Injection may be




ahead of the sedimentation tanks or the dissolved air flotation tanks,




which will serve as the chlorine contact tank if either sedimentation




or dissolved air flotation is used.  Otherwise it will be necessary to




construct a chlorine contact tank.  The volume of the tank is selected




to provide a 15-minute detention period at the design flow.
                                   284

-------
It is assumed that the wastewater will be chlorinated to a residual.




This requires estimation of the chlorine demand.  The chlorine demand




is estimated at 10 percent of the BOD content measured just ahead of




the point of application (this figure is available in the Treatment




model)/ but regardless of the value thus obtained/ the chlorine demand




is taken at not less than 6 ppm and not more than 25 ppm.  The lower




figure is based on Symons1 work at Buffalo (Ref. 11) as reported by




Camp  (Ref. 12).  The upper figure is based on the standards of the New




York State Health Department for chlorination of primary effluents




(fief. 13).  The number of chlorinators is equal to the chlorine demand




in pounds per day, divided by 2,000 if the total demand is less than




8,000.  if the total demand is greater than 8,000, it is assumed that




chlorinators with a capacity of 8,000 pounds per day will be used, and




the number is estimated by dividing the total demand by 8,000.  If a




chlorine contact tank is used the reduction of BOD is computed at 2.0




times the chlorine demand, in accordance with Ref. 14, but not more than




50 percent,  if chlorine is applied ahead of sedimentation or dissolved




air flotation the reduction in BOD has already been computed in a slightly




different manner, but in a way that should yield comparable results.






Up to this point in the Treatment model there has been no discussion of




the coliform content of the wastewater.  With the application of chlorine




for disinfection, however, the coliform content becomes of primary




importance.






The coliform content of the wastewater is supplied by the Transport




Model. . The coliform content at the point of application of the chlorine
                                   285

-------
is assumed to be reduced by the removal of suspended solids by previous

treatment processes in accordance with the following formula:
                                                SS at point of
            Coliforms at     _ col i forms in      application
        point of application     influent       SS at influent
                                              to treatment units
The efficiency of chlorination is conservatively estimated to be 99.9

percent effective (Ref. 15).  Coliform reductions are computed in sub-

routine KILL.  If the detention period for chlorine contact in any time-

step is less than 15 minutes, the efficiency is multiplied by
detention period
 15 minutes

SIZE OF DESIGN EVENT AND QUALITY OF TOTAL OVERFLOW
RELEASED .TO RECEIVING WATERS

At this time it is not possible to state what the size of the design event

should be.  It will be less than the maximum possible storm runoff

because even the storm sewers are not designed for the maximum storm.

For the sake of economy, except where public health is a consideration,

it will probably be less than the runoff from a one-year storm.  It may

be different for drainage basins of different size and different locality.

The ease with which the computer can compute results for events of

different size will make it possible to compute the economic costs and

benefits of varying design criteria.  Experience with the program

eventually will develop a better idea of the optimum size of the design

event.
                                   286

-------
In any case, if the storms in any typical year are run through the model




successively, the smaller storms will receive complete treatment,




whereas the larger storms will produce some bypassing of the treatment




units.  In these cases the Treatment model will compute the content of




suspended solids, BOD, and coliform organisms in the combined discharge




to the receiving waters.
                                    287

-------
    PART 4




ECONOMIC DATA

-------
                              SECTION 16




                       COST-EFFECTIVENESS MODEL




                                                                  Page




OBJECTIVE                                                          291




BACKGROUND                                                         291




THE MODEL SUBROUTINES                                              292




     Subroutine TSTCST                                             292




     Subroutine TRCOST                                             292




THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT                                            293




     Capital Costs                                                 294




     Operation and Maintenance Costs                               295




     Land Costs                                                    295




BASIS FOR INDIVIDUAL TREATMENT COSTS                               295




     Capital Costs                                                 295




     Irreducible Costs                                             30!




     Storm Event Costs                                             301




DEFAULT VALUES                                                     302




DATA LIMITATION                                                    302




TEST APPLICATIONS                                                  304
                                   289

-------
                              SECTION 16




                       COST-EFFECTIVENESS MODEL






OBJECTIVE




The objective of the Cost-Effectiveness model is to illustrate the




desirable size and type of treatment to be selected by providing:




     1.  Realistic costs of storage treatment for each storage option.




     2.  Realistic costs of treatment for each unit process.




The model is intended to provide guidance in the selection of the least




costly combination of treatment processes and storage treatment sizes




for varied storm patterns and locations.






BACKGROUND




The effectiveness of treatment is computed in terms of removal efficiencies




in the Treatment model and by the trace and the concentration histories




of the waste field in the Receiving Water Quality model.






The cost model will enable the user to obtain associated costs with:




     1.  Each level of efficiency selected.




     2.  The efficiencies required to satisfy water quality standards.






The associated costs can be minimized by variation of the treatment and




storage options selected.  Automatic cost minimization, a desirable




feature, was not within the scope of this study.
                                  291

-------
THE MODEL SUBROUTINES




The internal storage costs are calculated by subroutine TSTCST within




the internal storage model.  Treatment costs and external storage costs




are calculated by subroutine TRCOST within the Treatment model.






The operation of TSTCST and the internal storage model is governed by




the Transport Block.  The operation of TRCOST and the Treatment model




is governed by the Storage Block.






Subroutine TSTCST




Capital costs of hypothetical storage capacities are based on the maxi-




mum storage requirements.






The total cost is obtained from the fixed installation cost, and from




the variable cost of reservoir capacity and the required land.  Unit




processes (see default values subsection) are used to compute storage



and land costs.






Subroutine TRCOST




Given a design flow (hence unit capacities), subroutine TRCOST determines




the capital cost for the selected options  (shown in Table 16-1) in the




Treatment model.  The cumulative operating costs are computed after




simulation on each unit.






The sequence of operations in -subroutine TRCOST is:




     1.  Read and summarize all unit costs and factors>utilized in




         the computations.




     2.  Compute land and capital costs for each unit process selected




         and convert to annual costs.




                                   292

-------
                   Table 16-1.  TREATMENT PROCESSES
              Storage
              Bar racks
              Pumping stations  (influent and effluent)
              Sedimentation tanks
              Fine screens
              Microstrainers
              Dissolved air flotation
              High rate filters
              Effluent screens
              Chlorine contact tanks
     3.  Compute variable costs due to occurrence of storm events.

     4.  Present summary of all treatment costs.



Regional adjustments for the derived costs can be made by using the

ratio of the individual city ENR  (Engineering News-Record) index to the

national average index.  Also adjustments to future years may be made

using projected values of the appropriate index.  A set of suggested

values for the years 1970 to 1980 is supplied (Volume III, Section 5).

These future indexes were derived from the postwar ENR construction in-

dexes .


THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT

When feasible the computed costs are based on generalized .cost functions:

covering the range of treatment capacities (5 to 500 mgd).
                                  293

-------
The cost functions derived from one of the following forms, depending




on the unit process selected:






                    Unit cost      =  aQb                           (1)






                    Unit cost      =  cQ                            (2)






                    log unit cost  =  a + b\og Q                   (3)






where  Q        =  Design flow




       a, b, c  =  Parameters to be derived






The preceding functions closely agree with the latest study on treatment




process costs (Ref. 1).






The cost data utilized were  adjusted  for both variation in time and geo-




graphical  location of the construction by using the ENR cost indexes.






Where data were not sufficient to derive a function, the unit  costs




were based on recent  actual  bid prices allowing for reduction  in unit




costs of larger installations.  Further details on the basis of the




individual treatment  costs will follow.






The total  treatment cost is  based upon capital costs, operation and




maintenance costs, and the cost of land.






Capital Costs




The capital costs for each treatment  process are  calculated on the




basis of maximum installed capacity determined by the "design  flow."
                                  294

-------
The costs are converted to equivalent uniform annual costs using the




supplied interest rate and the effective life of the installation.






Operation and Maintenance Costs




In subroutine TRCOST operation and maintenance costs are divided into




two parts:  (1) the costs resulting from the existence of the plant,




called irreducible costs, which are independent of the plant operation;




and (2) the costs associated with storms, called storm event costs,




which depend upon the quantity and quality of the influents.






Land Costs




The user of the program may have more accurate data in terms of availa-




bility and cost of local land.  However, in the absence of such infor-




mation, a typical unit price is provided (see default values subsection)






Land costs are computed on the basis of the area required for each unit




process.  These costs have also been converted to equivalent annual




costs using:






                     Annual cost =  (L x  i)/100                      (4)






where  L  =  Total land costs




       i  =  Percentage interest rate






BASIS FOR INDIVIDUAL TREATMENT COSTS
Capital Costs



The basis for the cost of individual treatment processes are briefly



described below, followed by a presentation of the equations used
                                   295

-------
(Table 16-2).   Examples of the computed costs appear in the test




application subsection.




     1.  Storage




         The storage cost is based on a unit cost for reservoir




         construction allowing for the reduction of this cost for




         larger installations.




     2.  Bar Racks



         This cost is based on actual adjusted prices for screen units.




         Installation costs modified from Smith (Ref. 2) include the




         cost of screen chamber, overflow, bypass chamber, and Parshall




         flume.




     3.  Pumping Stations




         Capital costs of both influent and effluent pumping stations are




         based on cost files (Metcalf & Eddy cost files developed for




         internal use)  which were obtained from actual construction costs.




     4.   Sedimentation  Tanks




         The computed cost of sedimentation tanks  is based on similar




         cost  file data.   The costs are derived for rectangular tanks




         and can be adjusted to variable surface loading.




     5.   Fine  Screens




         The use of fine screens for sewage treatment in the United




         States is at the experimental stage.  For example, the




         Stephan and Schaffer. paper (Ref.  3)  does  not include any plant




         using fine screening.
                                  296

-------
                        Table 16-2.   TREATMENT COST SUMMARY
      Option
              Derived Capital Cost
                Equation, Dollars
                                                                              Applicable
                                                                               Capacity
                                                                              Range, mgd
Bar Racks
  Supply:
1000(11
                     where   n » Nvnnber of screens
                             S » screen capacity (cfs) -120,
                                 with a minimum of zero
                           ENR « ENR index for prescribed year
                                  (see Volume III)
                             F " Site factor (see Volume III)
                                                           All
Installs
i« MM -0.625 .ENR ._
10,000 Q     (5557) P
                      1,780

                      where  Q - Capacity  (mgd)
                                                                              £  100

                                                                              >  100
Inlet Pumping
50,000
                      32,000
                      32,000 Q (100)"& 100
Dissolved Air
Flotation
•t « n .«. r	2.3026	I/±±HL_)P
i.35 B exp L0.2075+0.0114 LogQJI1098  100
Fine Screens
                      12.000
                                                            All
Sedimentation
  In new tanks
  In storage
                      430
                      where   R • Overflow rate  (gpd/sq  ft )
                      where   U - Construction cost ($/cy)
                              V " Maximum storage during storm (cy)
                                                          < 100


                                                          >, 100



                                                            All
Micros trainers
30,000
                      20,000 Q(fgj)P
                                                                                 <  25


                                                                                 >  25
                                             297

-------
 Table  16-2.   TREATMENT  COST  SUMMARY  (Continued)
      Option
                                Derived Capital Cost
                                  Equation,  Dollars
Applicable
 Capacity
Range, mgd
High Rate Filters
                     54,000
   All
Effluent Screens
  Supply and
  install:
  Channel works:
                     5,000
                     200 g F
                     7,000 Q


                     1,246 Q
0.625.ENR
     *1034'
 < 100


 £100


 < 100


 > 100
Outlet Pumping
                     (Same  as Inlet Pumping)
Chlorine Contact
Tank & Equipment
                     18,350
                     16,000 Q  
-------
    Two types of designs are envisioned.   The first is based on a




    pilot plant installation at Seattle,  Washington.   The alternative




    design would use an installation identical to the microstraining




    process but with coarser screens.  The capital costs  derived




    are based on the latter alternative because of the wider use of




    such processes in Europe and the United States (two installations




    at Chicago, one at Lebanon, Ohio, and one at Denver).  The capital




    cost of fine screens is directly comparable to microstrainers




    after allowance is made for increased capacities due  to consider-




    ably larger open screen areas.  A cost factor 6f 1/2  was used in




    this study.



6.  Dissolved Air Flotation




    Dissolved air flotation is also a relatively new process, hence




    it was felt that the most accurate basis for the derivation of




    capital costs would be the actual bid prices for a 25-mgd facility




    presently being constructed in San Francisco.  The prices




    were modified to allow for:




    a.  Reduction in capital costs due to inclusion of units which




        were not an integral part of the  process.



    b.  A 15 percent allowance for engineering and contingencies.




    c.  A 30 percent reduction in costs because of the difficult




        urban location of the site and possible conservative design




        capacity due to the untried nature of the treatment process.




    d.  Allowance was made for the variation in costs due to the




        size of the installation.
                             299

-------
 7.  Microstrainers




     Cost estimates for microstraining equipment were obtained




     from several manufacturers.   However,  when these costs




     (expressed per mgd of installed capacity)  were compared to the




     actual bid prices for the few existing treatment plants,  sharp




     variations in unit prices were obtained.   Although available




     equipment costs can be considered reliable, installation costs




     per unit basis cannot.  The  primary reason for the inconsistency




     can be attributed to the large variations  in installed capacities




      and uncertainty relative to the ultimate  capacity of the




     microstraining units.  Hence the unit prices that were used allow




     for larger design loading than is presently used and do not




     represent the price for any single installation.




 8.  High Rate Filters




     These costs are based on cost file data and cost functions




     derived by Smith (Ref. 2).  The costs are adjusted to allow




     for high surface loading of the filters.




 9.  Effluent Screens




     These costs are based on several manufacturers' bid prices plus




     an allowance made for installation costs similar to bar rack



     installations.




10.  Contact Tanks




     The costs of contact tanks are based on function derived by




     Smith (Ref. 2).  Separate costs of chlorinators are derived on




     the basis of cost file data.
                               300

-------
Irreducible Costs
For all unit processes the irreducible costs are assumed to be a fixed
percentage of the initial capital investment.  The amounts vary between
1 percent and 2 percent and depend upon the mechanical complexity of
the equipment.  Irreducible costs are presented in Table 16-3.

              Table 16-3. IRREDUCIBLE MAINTENANCE COSTS

                                      Assumed Percentage of
      Treatment Process          Total Capital Investment Per Year

    Bar screens                                1%
    Pumping station, influent                  2
    Dissolved air flotation                    2
    Fine screens                               2
    Sedimentation tanks                        1
    Microstrainers                             2
    High rate filters                          2
    Effluent screens                           1.5
    Pumping station, effluent                  2
    Chlorine contact tanks                     2
Storm Event Costs
The storm event costs are derived based on a fixed cost assumed to be
associated with clean-up or check-up activity and a variable cost
depending on the volume of the influent processed.  These costs are
summarized in Table 16-4.
                                   301

-------
                     Table 16-4.  STORM EVENT COSTS
 Treatment Process
  Assumed Variable
        Cost
Assumed Fixed
Cost, $/storms
 Bar racks
 Pumping station

 Dissolved air
 flotation
 Fine screens
 Sedimentation tanks
 Microstrainers
 High rate filters
 Effluent screens

 Pumping station

 Chlorine contact
 tanks including
 chlorinators
Based on the volume
of solids to be
disposed.
Based on 2
-------
              Table 16- 5.  DEFAULT VALUES FOR COST SUBROUTINES






	Item	Value Programmed




Interest rate                               7%




Amortization period                         25 years




Site factor                                 1-00




Unit cost land                              $20,000/acre




Unit cost power                             2$/kwh




Unit cost chlorine                          20
-------
TEST APPLICATIONS




Several runs selecting design flow, location, and actual storm patterns




were made.  The results are summarized in Table 16-6.  Costs per acre




of the tributary drainage basin, as well as total costs, are reported




for ease of comparison of alternate solutions.
                                  304

-------
          Table  16-6.  SAMPLE TEST RUNS
Location Smithville, U.S.A.
Tributary area 500 acres
Design flow 25 mgd
Total volume of
influents processed 12 million gal.
CAPITAL COSTS ANNUAL COSTS
TREATMENT "LEVEL" "iNiTAL LAND" "TSSTAL 	 LAND 	 KlN'MATST
8AR RACKS ""I •.MISIK" ""im" "Hi7«7 	 55 " ""lW§ "
NO INLET PUMPING 2 0. 0. 0. 0 0
DISS AIR FLOAT -N 3 ISWiZ. 3581. 132976. 251 30993
BYPASS LEVEL " "ffiSTAL 	 MSB 	 Mlii'WlNf
BAR RACKS 	 1 	 9«7>7" "" J5CI7" "Tllj 	 «T 	 915T"
NO INLET PUMIMNU 2 0. 0. 0 0. 0.
SfDIKENTATION 3 310310. 8815. 26C.I8 C17. 3103.
MICRGSIKAIUKKS d HSifcO. 11017. 29
-------
                  PART 5

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS, REFERENCES, PUBLICATIONS,
GLOSSARY AND ABBREVIATIONS, AND APPENDICES

-------
  SECTION 17




ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
       307

-------
                               SECTION 17




                            ACKNOWLEDGMENTS






The consortium is deeply indebted to the following persons and their




organizations for the services they rendered to the project group in the




development, demonstration, and verification of the EPA Storm Water




Management Model:




     1.  Mr. William A. Rosenkranz, Chief, and Mr. Darwin R.  Wright,




         Project Officer, of the Storm and Combined Sewer Pollution




         Control Branch of the Environmental Protection Agency,




         Washington, D.C., for their generous assistance and guidance.




     2.  Mr. Alan 0. Friedland, Chief, Mr. Harold C. Coffee,  Jr., and




         Mr. Robert T. Cockburn of the Division of Sanitary Engineering,




         City of San Francisco, and Mr. T. G. Shea of Engineering-




         Science , Inc., for furnishing data on the Baker and Selby




         Street systems.




     3.  Dr. Louis M. Laushey and Dr. Herbert C. Preul of the Civil




         Engineering Department of the University of Cincinnati and the




         graduate student project group coordinated by Abdul S. Rashidi




         for providing necessary data on the Bloody Run drainage basin,




         Cincinnati, Ohio.




     4.  Mr. George A. Moorehead, Chief of Systems and Planning,




         Department of Sanitary Engineering, District of Columbia, and




         Mr. Michael S. Neijna of Roy F. Weston, Inc., for furnishing




         data on the Kingman Lake study area.




     5.  Mr. Joseph V. Radziul, Chief, and Mr. William L. Greene of the




         Research and Development Unit of the City of Philadelphia Water






                                  309

-------
         Department for furnishing data on the Wingohocking and  Callowhill




         study areas.






The consortium management and the project work of Metcalf & Eddy,  inc.,




were under the direction of Mr. Dean F. Coburn, Senior Vice President,




and Mr. John A. Lager, Project Manager and Principal Investigator.




Other key personnel of Metcalf & Eddy, Inc.,  were Drs. Byrne  Perry,




George Tchobanoglous, and E. John Finnemore,  and Messrs.  William G.




Smith, Dennis A. Sandretto, Charles D. Tonkin, and Ferdinand  K.  Chen.




Particular acknowledgment is given to Mr. Allen J. Burdoin, staff  con-




sultant, for his worthy contributions to the  theoretical  development of




the surface quality and treatment models.






The project work of the Department of Environmental Engineering  of the




University of Florida was directed by Dr. Edwin E. Pyatt, Chairman and




Principal Investigator, and Mr. Larry W. Russell, Senior  Research




Assistant.  Other key personnel for the University of Florida were




Drs. Wayne C. Huber and James F. Heaney, and  Messrs. Ralph A. Aleman




and B. James Carter.  Dr. John C. Schaake, Jr., consultant, provided




valuable assistance in the development of the Transport Model.






The project work of Water Resources Engineers, Inc., was  directed  by




Drs. Gerald T. Orlob, President, and Robert P. Shubinski, Principal




Engineer and Project Leader.  Other key personnel for Water Resources




Engineers were Mr. Marvin R. Lindorf, Vice President, Drs. Ian King and




Carl W. Chen, and Mr. John R. Monser.
                                   310

-------
SECTION 18




REFERENCES
    311

-------
                              SECTION 18

                              REFERENCES
Model Overview (Section 3)

 1.  American Public Works Association, "Water Pollution Aspects of
     Urban Runoff," January 1969, Federal Water Pollution  Control
     Administration Contract WP-20-15.

 2.  Sullivan, Richard H., "Assessment  of Combined Sewer Problems,"
     presented at the Seminar on Storm  and Combined Sewer  Overflows,
     November 1969, Federal Water Quality Administration Laboratory,
     Edison, New Jersey.
Surface Runoff Quantity Model (Section 5)

 1.  Rogers, R. A., "Rational - Rational Method of Storm Drainage Design,"
     Journal of the Irrigation and Drainage, American Society of civil
     Engineers, Vol. 94, No. IR4, December 1968, pp. 465-480.

 2.  Watkins, L. H. and Young, C. P.,"Developments in Urban Hydrology in
     Great Britain," August 1964, Paper presented at the Conference on
     Urban Hydrology Research, at Proctor Academy, New Hampshire.

 3.  Izzard, C. F., "Hydraulics of Runoff from Developed Surfaces,"
     1946, Proc. Highway Research Board, Vol. 26, pp. 129-150.

 4.  Linsley, Jr., R. K., Kohler, M. A., and Paulhus, J. L. H., Applied
     Hydrology, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1949.

 5.  Tholin, A. L. and Keifer, C. J., "Hydrology of Urban Runoff,"
     Transactions, American Society of Civil Engineers, Paper No. 3061,
     Vol. 125, 1960.

 6.  Crawford, N. H. and Linsley, R. K., "Digital Simulation in Hydrology,
     Stanford Watershed Model IV," Technical Report No. 39, July 1966,
     Department of Civil Engineering, Stanford University.

 7.  McCracken, D. D. and Dorn, W. S., Numerical Method and FORTRAN
     Programming, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1964.

 8.  American Society of Civil Engineers, Manual of Engineering Practice
     No. 37, "Design and Construction of Sanitary and Storm Sewers,"
     tWater Pollution Control Federation, Manual of Practice No. 9),
     1960.
                                   313

-------
 9.  Tucker, L.  S.,  "Oakdale Gaging Installation,  Chicago  -  Instrumenta-
     tion and Data," Technical Memorandum No.  2, August 15,  1968,
     American Society of Civil Engineers,  Urban Water Resources  Research
     Program.

10.  Tucker, L.  S.,  "Northwood Gaging Installation,  Baltimore  -  Instru-
     mentation and Data," Technical Memorandum No.  1,  August 1968,
     American Society of Civil Engineers,  Urban Water Resources  Research
     Program.
Dry Weather Flow Quantity Model (Section 6)

 1.  American Public Works Association,  "Water Pollution Aspects  of Urban
     Runoff," January 1969, Federal Water Pollution Control Administration
     Contract WP-20-15.

 2.  Linaweaver, F.  P.,  "Final and Summary Report on the Residential
     Water Use Research Project,"  July 1966,  Johns Hopkins University,
     Baltimore, Maryland.

 3.  Hittman Associates,  Inc., "Main I,  A System of Computerized  Models
     for Calculating and Evaluating Municipal Water Requirements  -
     Volume I," June 1968, OWRR Contract 14-01-001.

 4.  U. S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census, Washington, D. C.,
     "Water Use in Manufacturing,  1963 Census of Manufacturers,"  Prelim-
     inary Report, Subject Series  MC63(1)-10.

 5.  Linaweaver, F. P. and Geyer, J. C.,  "Commercial Water Use Project,"
     Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland.

 6.  Howe, C. W. and Linaweaver, F. P.,  "The Impact of Price on Residential
     Water Demand and Its Relation to System Design and Price Structure,"
     Water Resources Research, Vol. 3, No. 1, 1967.
Infiltration Model (Section 7)
 1.   Lentz, J.  J.,  Estimation of Design Maximum Domestic Sewage Flow
     Rates,  Johns Hopkins  University,  Department of Sanitary  Engineering
     and Water  Resources,  Baltimore, Maryland,  May  1963.

 2.   Brooks, R.  H.  and Corey,  A.  T., "Properties of Porous  Media Affecting
     Fluid Flow," Journal  of the Irrigation and Drainage  Division,
     Proceedings of the American Society of Civil Engineers,  Vol. 92,
     No. 1R2, June  1966, pp.  61-88.
                                   314

-------
3.  Metcalf s Eddy, inc., "storm Water Problems and Control," Federal
    Water Quality Administration, Program No.  11022EQG,  May 1970.

4.  U. S. Department of Commerce, Environmental Data Service, National
    Weather Records Center,  Asheville, North Carolina 28801, "Local
    Climatological Data."

5.  Santry, Jr., I. W. , "Infiltration in Sanitary Sewers,"  Journal of
    the Water Pollution Control Federation,  Vol. 36, No.  10, October
    1964.

6.  Geyer, J. C. and Lentz, J. J., "An Evaluation of the Problems of
    Sanitary Sewer System Design, " Johns Hopkins University, Department
    of Sanitary Engineering and Water Resources, Baltimore, Maryland,
    1963.

7.  American Society of Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers,  "Heating,
    Ventilating, Air Conditioning Guide," Annual Publication, 1956.

8.  Linsley, Jr.,  R. K., Kohler,  M. A., and Paulhus, J.  L. H.,  Applied
    Hydrology,  McGraw-Hill Book  Company, Inc.,. New York, 1949,  p. 414.
Transport Model (Section 8)

 1.  Chow, V. T.,  Open-Channel Hydraulics,  McGraw-Hill Book Company,
     1959.

 2.  Henderson, F. M.,  Open Channel Flow,  MacMillan,  1966.

 3.  Yevjevich, v., "Computed and Observed Unsteady Water-Surface
     Profiles in a Circular Cross-Section," Paper presented at the
     American Society of Civil Engineers Hydraulics Division, 16th
     Annual Specialty Conference, August 1968.

 4.  Harris, G., "Development of a Computer Program to Route Runoff
     in the Minneapolis-St. Paul Interceptor Sewers," University of
     Minnesota, St. Anthony Falls Hydraulic Laboratory, Memorandum
     No. M-121, December 1968.

 5.  American Society of Civil Engineers, Manual of Engineering
     Practice No. 37, "Design and Construction of Sanitary and Storm
     Sewers>"  (Water Pollution Control Federation, Manual of Practice
     No. 9), 1960.

 6.  Eagleson, P. S., "Unit Hydrograph Characteristics for Sewered
     Areas," Proceedings of the American Society pf Civil Engineers,
     Vol. 88, No. HY2, March 1962, pp. 1-25.
                                   315

-------
 7.  Watkins, L. H. and Young, C. P., "Developments in Urban Hydrology
     in Great Britain," August 1964, Paper presented at the Conference
     on Urban Hydrology Research at Proctor Academy, New Hampshire.

 8.  Terstriep, M. L. and Stall, J. B., "Urban Runoff by Road Research
     Laboratory Method," Proceedings of the American Society of Civil
     Engineers, Vol. 95, No. HY6, November 1969, pp. 1809-1834.

 9.  O'Brien, G. G., Hyman, M. A., and Kaplan, S.,  "A Study of the
     Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations," Journal
     Math, and Physics, No. 29, 1951, pp.  223-251.

10.  Streeter, V. L. and Wiley, E. B., Hydraulic Transients, McGraw-
     Hill Book Company, 1967.

11.  Ackers, P.  and Harrison, A. J. M., "Attenuation of Flood Waves
     in Part-Pull Pipes," Proceedings of the Institution of Civil
     Engineers,  Vol. 28, 6777, July 1964,  pp.  361-381.
Storage Model (Section 9)

 1.  Riis-Carstensen, Erik, "Sewage Works, Improving the Efficiency of
     Existing Interceptors," Sewage and Industrial Wastes,  Vol.  27,
     No. 10, October 1955.

 2.  Engineering-Science, Inc., "Characterization and Treatment of
     Combined Sewer Overflows," City and County of San Francisco,
     Department of Public Works, November 1967, Federal Water
     Pollution Control Administration Grant WPC-112-01-66.
Receiving Water Quantity Model (Section 10)

 1.   Garrison,  J.  M.,  Granju,  J.  P.,  and Price,  J.  T.,  "Unsteady Flow
     Simulation in Rivers and  Reservoirs," Journal  of  the  Hydraulics
     Division,  American Society of Civil Engineers,  Vol. 95,  No. HY5,
     September  1969.

 2.   Neumann, G.  and Pierson,  Jr., W.,  Principles of Physical Oceanography,
     Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs,  New  Jersey,  1966.

 3.   Sverdrup,  H.  U.,  Johnson,  M.  W.,  and Fleming,  R.  H.,  The Oceans,
     Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs,  New  Jersey,  1942.

 4.   Water Resources Engineers,  Inc.,  "A Water Quality Model  of the
     Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta," June 1965, report  to the  United
     States Public Health Service, Division  of Water Supply and
     Pollution  Control,  Region  Nine.
                                  316

-------
 5.  Water Resources Engineers,  Inc.,  "A Mathematical  Model of  Port
     Phillip," 1968, report to Melbourne and Metropolitan Board of
     Works, Melbourne,  Australia.

 6.  Callaway, R.  J., Byram, K.  V.,  and Ditsworth,  G.  R., "Mathematical
     Model of the  Columbia River from Pacific Ocean to Bonneville Dam,
     Part I," November 1969, Federal Water Pollution Control Administra-
     tion, Northwest Region, Pacific Northwest Water Laboratory.
Surface Runoff Quality Model (Section 11)

 1.  Wiebel, S.R.,  Anderson, R. J.,  and Woodward, R. L.,  "Urban Land
     Runoff as a Factor in Stream Pollution,"  Journal of the Water Pol-
     lution Control Federation, Vol. 36, No. 7, July 1964.

 2.  American Public Works Association, "Water Pollution Aspects of Urban
     Runoff," January 1969, Federal Water Pollution Control Administration
     Contract WP-20-15.

 3.  Engineering-Science, Inc., "Characterization and Treatment of Com-
     bined Sewer Overflows,"  City and County of San Francisco, Depart-
     ment of Public Works, November 1967, Federal Water Pollution Control
     Administration Grant WPC-112-01-66.

 4.  Fair, G. M. and Geyer, J. C., Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal,
     John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1954, p. 398.

 5.  Tholin, A. L.  and Kiefer, C. J., "Hydrology of Urban Runoff,"
     Transactions,  American Society of Civil Engineers, Paper No. 3061,
     Vol. 125, 1960.

 6.  U. S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, U» S. Public
     Health. Service, "Pollutional Effects of Stormwater and Overflows
     from Combined Sewer Systems - A Preliminary Appraisal," November
     1964.

 7.  Palmer, C. L., "The Pollutional Effects of  Stormwater Overflows
     from Combined Sewers," Sewage and Industrial Wastes, February  1950.
Dry Weather Flow Duality Model  (Section 12)

 1.  Fair, G. M. and Geyer, J. C., Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal,
     John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1954.

 2.  Haseltine, T. R., "Addition of Garbage to Sewage," Water and  Sewage
     Works, 1950.
                                   317

-------
 3.  Watson, K. S., et al.,"The Contribution from the  Individual Home
     to the Sewer System," Journal of the Water Pollution  Control
     Federation, Vol.  39,  No.  12,  1967,  p. 2039.

 4.  Hubbell, J. W.,  "Commercial and Institutional Wastewater  Loadings,"
     Journal of the Water  Pollution Control Federation, Vol. 34, No. 9,
     1962, p. 962.

 5.  Rudolph, W., "Principles  of Sewage  Treatment," National Lime
     Association, Washington,  D.C., 1955.

 6.  Engineering-Science,  Inc., "Characterization and  Treatment of
     Combined Sewer Overflows," City and County of San Francisco,
     Department of Public  Works, November 1967, Federal Water  Pollution
     Control Administration Grant WPC-112-01-66.

 7.  Gameson, A. L. H.  and Davidson, R.  N., "Storm-Water Investigations
     at Northampton,"  Journal  of the Institute  of Sewage Purification,
     1963, pp. 117-119.
Decay Model (Section 13)

 1.   Gustafsson,  B.  and Westberg,  W.,  "Oxygen  Consumption  and  Reaeration
     in Sewers,"  Advances  in Water Pollution Research,  Proceedings  from
     the Second International Conference  of Water  Pollution  Research,
     Tokyo, Vol.  1,  August 1964.

 2.   Velzy, C.  R. and Sprague, J.  M.,  "Infiltration  Specifications  and
     Tests," Sewage  and Industrial Wastes, Vol.  27,  No.  3, March  1955.

 3.   Raths, C.  H. and McCauley,  R. F.,  "Deposition in a Sanitary  Sewer,"
     Water and  Sewage Works, May 1962.

 4.   FMC Corporation, Central Engineering Laboratories,  "Feasibility of
     a Periodic Flushing System for Combined Sewer Cleansing," August
     1967, Federal Water Pollution Control Administration  Contract  No.
     14-12-19.

 5.   Hill, H. M., Srnvasan,  V. S., and Unny, T.  E.,  "Instability  of Flat
     Bed in Alluvial Channels,"  Journal of the Hydraulics  Division,
     American Society of Civil Engineers, September  1969.

 6.   Fair, G. M.  and Geyer,  J. C., Water  Supply  and  Wastewater Disposal,
     John Wiley and Sons,  Inc., New York, 1954,  p. 398.

 7.   Carstens,  M. R., "A Theory for Heterogeneous  Flow of  Solids  in
     Pipes," Journal of the Hydraulics Division, American  Society of
     Civil Engineers, September 1969.
                                  318

-------
 8.   American Public Works Association, "Water Pollution Aspects of
     Urban Runoff," January 1969, Federal Water Pollution Control
     Administration Contract WP-20-15.

 9.   Streeter,  W.  H.  and Phelps,  E.  B.,  "A Study of the  Pollution and
     Natural Purification of the  Ohio River,"  February 1925, Public
     Health Bulletin No. 146.

10.   Engineering-Science, Inc.,  "Characterization  and Treatment of
     Combined Sewer Overflows,"  City and County of San Francisco,
     Department of Public Works,  November 1967,  Federal  Water Pollution
     Control Administration Grant WPC-112-01-66.
Receiving Water Quality Model (Section 14)

  1.  Water Resources Engineers, Inc., "A Water Quality Model of the
     Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta," June 1965, report to the United
     States Public Health Service, Division of Water Supply and
     Pollution Control, Region Nine.

  2.  Water Resources Engineers, Inc., "A Mathematical Model of Port
     Phillip," 1968, report to Melbourne and Metropolitan Board of
     Works, Melbourne, Australia.

  3.  Callaway, R. J., Byram, K. V., and Ditsworth, G. R., "Mathematical
     Model of the Columbia River from Pacific Ocean to Bonneville Dam,
     Part I," November 1969, Federal Water Pollution Control Adminis-
     tration, Northwest Region, Pacific Northwest Water Laboratory.
Treatment Model (Section 15)

 1.  American Society of Civil Engineers, Manual of Engineering Practice
     No. 36, "Sewage Treatment Plant Design," (Water Pollution Control
     Federation, Manual of Practice No. 8), 1959.

 2.  Mason, Donald G., "The Use of Screening/Dissolved Air Flotation for
     Treating Combined Sewer Overflow," presented at the Seminar on
     Storm and Combined Sewer Pollution Overflows, November 1969, Federal
     Water Quality Administration Laboratory, Edison, New Jersey.

 3.  Metcalf & Eddy, Inc., American Sewerage Practice, 3rd ed., Vol. Ill,
     McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., 1935.

 4.  Fair, G. M. and Geyer, J. C., Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal,
     John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1954.

 5.  Klein, River Pollution, Vol. Ill, Butterworth, Inc., pp. 155-6.
                                   319

-------
 6.   Bodien and Stenburg,  "Microstraining Effectively Polishes Activated
     Sludge Plant Effluent," Water and Wastes Engineering,  September
     1966.

 7.   Lynam, Ettelt, and McAloon,  "Tertiary Treatment at Metro Chicago
     by Means of Rapid Sand Filters and Microstrainers," Journal  of the
     Water  Pollution Control Federation, February 1969.

 8.   Keilbaugh, Clover, and Yatsuk, "Microstraining - with  Ozonation or
     Chlorination - of Combined Sewer Overflows," presented at the
     Seminar on Storm and  Combined Sewer Pollution Overflows, November
     1969,  Federal Water Quality Administration  Laboratory, Edison,
     New Jersey.

 9.   Engineering-Science,  Inc., "Characterization and Treatment of
     Combined Sewer Overflows," City and County  of San Francisco,
     Department of Public  Works,  November 1967,  Federal Water Pollution
     Control Administration Grant WPC-112-01-66.

10.   DeFilippi, John A., "Assessment of Alternative Methods for Control/
     Treatment of Combined Sewer Overflows,"  presented at the Seminar
     on Storm and Combined Sewer Overflows, November 1969,  Federal
     Water  Quality Administration Laboratory, Edison, New Jersey.

11.   Symons, Simpson, and  Kin,  "Variation in  the  Chlorine Demand  of
     Buffalo Sewage," Sewage Works Journal, March 1941.

12.   Camp,  Thomas R., "Chlorination of Mixed  Sewage and Stormwater,"
     and discussion, Journal Sanitary Engineering Division, American
     Society of Civil Engineers,  January 1961.

13.   New York State, Department of Health, "Standards for Waste
     Treatment Works," May 1965,  Bulletin 1,  Part I.

14.   American Public Health Association, "Chlorination in Sewage
     Treatment," 1933, report of Committee on Sewage Disposal.

15.   Camp,  Thomas R., Water and Its Impurities,  Reinhold, 1963.
 Cost-Effectiveness Model (Section 16)

 1.  Shah, Kanti L. and Reid, George W.,  "Techniques for Estimating
     Construction Costs  of Waste  Treatment Plants," Journal of the
     Water Pollution Control Federation,  May 1970.
                                   320

-------
2.  Smith, Robert,  "Cost of Conventional and Advanced Treatment  of
    Wastewater," Journal of the Water Pollution Control Federation,
    September 1968.

3.  Stephen,  David G.  and Schaffer,  Robert B.,  "Wastewater Treatment
    and Renovation Status of Process Development," Journal of the Water
    Pollution Control  Federation,  March 1970.
                                  321

-------
 SECTION 19




PUBLICATIONS
     323

-------
                              SECTION 19


                             PUBLICATIONS
Chen, C. W. and Shubinski, R. P., "Computer Simulation of Urban  Storm
Water Runoff,"  Journal of Hydraulics Division,  Proceedings  of the
American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol.  97,  No.  HY2, February  1971,
pp. 289-301.

Lager, J. A., "A Simulation Technique for Assessing Storm and Combined
Sewer Systems," Combined Sewer Overflow Seminar Papers, Federal  Water
Pollution Control Administration, DAST-37, November 1969, pp. 150-170.

Lager, J. A., Shubinski, R. P., and Russell, L.  W., "Triumvirate Model
for Storm Water Management," presented at 43rd Annual Conference of the
Water Pollution Control Federation, October 1970,  and has been accepted
for publication in the Journal of the Water Pollution Control Federation,
1971.
                                  325

-------
        SECTION 20





GLOSSARY AND ABBREVIATIONS
             327

-------
                               SECTION 20




                                GLOSSARY







WATERSHED - The area which is drained by a river system.




DRAINAGE BASIN  (STUDY AREA) - The area which contributes runoff to a




     stream at a given point (an individual section of a watershed).




SUBCATCHMENT - A subdivision of a drainage basin (generally determined




     by topography and pipe network configuration).




SUBAREA - A subdivision of a subcatchment (generally based upon a single




     land use but may be identical to a subcatchment).







                             ABBREVIATIONS
APWA            - American Public Works Association




ASCE            - American Society of Civil Engineers




EPA             - Environmental Protection Agency




MSB             - Metcalf & Eddy, Inc.




UF              - University of Florida




USPH            - U.S. Public Health Service




WRE             - Water Resources Engineers, Inc.
BOD             - biochemical oxygen demand (5-day)



cf              - cubic feet




cfs             - cubic feet per second




COD             - chemical oxygen demand




DO              - dissolved oxygen




DWF             - dry weather flow




fpm             - feet per minute
                                  329

-------
 fps




 ft




 gal.




 gal./capita/day




 gpd




 gph




 gpm




 gpm/sq ft




 gpsf




 hr




 in.




 in./hr




 JCL




 Ib




 Ib/acre/day




 Ib/acre/yr




 Ib/capi ta/day




 Ib/cf




 Ib/day/cfs




 Ib/ft




 Ib/sec




mgd




mg/gram




mg/L




min




mm
feet per second




feet




gallons




gallons per capita per day




gallons per day




gallons per hour




gallons per minute




gallons per minute per square foot




gallons per square foot




hour




inches




inches per hour




job control language




pounds




pounds per acre per day




pounds per acre per year




pounds per capita per day




pounds per cubic foot




pounds per day per cubic feet per second




pounds per foot




pounds per second




million gallons per day




milligrams per gram




milligrams per liter




minutes




millimeters
                                   330

-------
MPN

ppm

psf

psi

rpm

sec

sq ft

sq ft/min

SS

tons/mo

tons/sq mi/mo

VSS

yr
     A
     a
     E
     n
     0
- most probable number

- parts per million

- pounds per square foot

- pounds per square inch

- revolutions per minute

- second

- square feet

- square feet per minute

- suspended solids

- tons per month

- tons per square mile per month

- volatile suspended solids

- year

                   SYMBOLS

delta

alpha

sigma

less than

greater than

partial differentiation

rho

psi

Pi
theta
                                   331

-------
                              SECTION 21

                              APPENDICES



A.  PRELIMINARY INFILTRATION ANALYSIS

B.  DETAILED THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT FOR DECAY MODEL

    SEWER QUALITY ROUTING

         General Equation for Continuity of Mass

         Assumptions and Properties of the Various
           Hydraulic Elements in the Transport Model

    SEDIMENT UPTAKE AND DEPOSITION MODEL

         Procedure for Suspended Solids

         Definition of Variables

         Hydraulic Radius (Function RADH)
                                   333

-------
                              APPENDIX A




                  PRELIMINARY INFILTRATION  ANALYSIS






It was originally thought that a generalized predictive  equation  for




infiltration could be developed.  By incorporating both  spatially and




time dependent variables, the generalized equation could then be  applied




to predicting sewer infiltration in any urban area in the country for




any time of the year.  The following summarizes the  development of such




an equation and the reasons for reverting to the analysis described in




Section 7.  (References cited are all in. Section 7 of References).






One reason that so little is known of the importance and effect of infil-




tration on sewer flow is the lack of actual flow measurements of  infil-




tration.  This lack of flow data posed a severe constraint on justifying,




developing, and verifying any theoretical or empirical Infiltration




Model.  To overcome this constraint, minimum daily sewage flow data




recorded over a two-year period on the Johns Hopkins Residential Sewerage




Research Project  (Ref. 1)* for seven areas throughout the country were




obtained.  Because of the inclusion of foundation drains in at least




one of the seven areas and the possibility of some sewage flow,  the data




give a slightly inflated estimate of infiltration.






Additional data were sought to supplement  the above data since it has




been noted that infiltration has been shown  (Refs. 6,5) to vary  with




conditions of the sewer, level of groundwater,  amount of precipitation,




and soil conditions.  By obtaining appropriate  sewer, soil, and
                                   335

-------
precipitation information, a sufficient data base was established.




Categories and sources of information gathered are as follows:




     1.  Climatological data - U. S. Weather Bureau




     2.  Groundwater data - U. S. Geological Survey




     3.  Sewer system data - individual cities.






In addition, the following manufacturers of sewer pipe were contacted:




     1.  National Clay Pipe Institute




     2.  Cast Iron Research Association




     3.  Dickey Clay Mfg. Company




     4.  Portland Cement Association




     5.  American Concrete Pipe Association




     6.  Hamilton Kent Mfg. Company




     7.  K. T. Snyder Company, Inc.




     8.  American Pipe Services.






Multiple regression techniques were then applied to the data to describe




daily variation in the recorded minimum flows.  Flow variance was initially




divided into that due to either location-dependent or time-dependent




variables with a separate analysis performed  for each.  Location-




dependent variables describing the seven study areas were correlated




with three-month average minimum flows using  the following procedure:




     1.  Determination of the existence of regression using three-month




         averages for the following study area data:




         a.  Number of service connections




         b.  Area




         c.  Distance between manholes






                                   336

-------
         d.   Pipe diameter




         e.   Total pipe length




         f.   Pipe grade




         g.   Jointing material




         h.   Age




         i.   Pipe material




         j.   Water table head.




     2.  Elimination of variables accounting for the  least amount of




         variance.




     3.  Elimination of redundant variables.




     4.  Transformation of the remaining variables to obtain better




         correlation and regression.






From the above data manipulations, total pipe length/ pipe diameter,




jointing compound, and water table height above the sewer accounted for




95 percent of the variance in minimum sewage flows.  Water table height




was taken as an average and squared to increase correlation.  Jointing




compounds were qualified by noting their relative susceptibility to root




penetration.  Prom the amount of sewer clogging due to root penetration




in the seven study areas, relative factors for joints were established:




     1.  Cement mortar, 11.0




     2.  Lime mortar, 9.0




     3.  Bituminous hot pour, 3.5




     4.  Rubber gasket, 1.0.
                                   337

-------
 After receiving  necessary  climatological and geological information for




 each  of  the  seven  study  areas,  analysis of variance was done on time-




 dependent variables and  minimum flows.  Data manipulation over time was




 as  follows:




      1.  Determination of  the existence of regression using the




         following recorded data:




         a.  Rainfall




         b.  Groundwater level




         c.  Temperature




         d.  Relative humidity.




      2.  Elimination of  variables accounting for the least amount of




         variance.




      3.  Transformation  of remaining variables to obtain better




         correlation and regression as follows:




         a.  Use of time delays  ranging from one to six days on rainfall




             and water table data.




         b.  Use of power transformation on water table data.




         c.  Use of a precipitation index to indicate soil moisture




             conditions.






From  the above data manipulations, only rainfall significantly accounted




for minimum  flow variation in each study area.  Transformations on rain-




fall data using both a time delay depending on soil type and an antece-




dent precipitation index (Ref.8 ) were proposed and tested successfully.




Time delays were found by regressing rainfall from each of six previous




days on daily minimum sewage flows.  From data from four of the seven
                                   338

-------
study areas, rain falling on the indicated soil type and the indicated



number of days prior to minimum flow measurement correlated best as



follows:



     1.  Day 3 for sandy soil



     2.  Day 4 for rocky soil



     3.  Day 5 for clay soil.





Soil moisture was accounted for with the antecedent precipitation index



found by applying Eq. Al to prior daily rainfall.





                API  =  b.P. + ... + b P  + ... + b P               (Al)
                         11          t t          n n




where  P   =  Amount of precipitation (in.) which occurred t days prior



              to flow measurement



       bt  =  Kfc with



       K   =  0.86 to 0.89 for eastern and central portions of country



              0.76 for high precipitation portions of country



              0.94 for low precipitation portions of country





Remaining variables from the above analyses were finally combined in an



overall regression analysis to form a predictive equation for infiltra-



tion that depends upon subarea characteristics and time.  Eq. A2



accounted for 83 percent of the variation in the Johns Hopkins data and



exhibited significant regression at the 95 percent confidence level.
      QINFIL  =  -20.64 + 15.41(API_) + 2.79 (DIAM) - 31.71(RNY) +

                                                                     (A2)

                 0.64(CJOIT) + 0.25(LEN)
                                   339

-------
where  API    =  Antecedent precipitation index




       DIAM   =  Diameter of largest subarea pipe (in.)




       RNY    =  Rainfall Y days prior to infiltration estimate (in.),




                 Y = 3 for sandy soil, Y = 4 for rocky soil, and Y = 5




                 for clay soil




       CJOIT  =  Joint factor




       LEN    =  Total sewer length in each subarea (miles)






By showing significant regression, Eq. A2 satisfied the initial assump-




tion that infiltration could be modeled using information on the avail-




ability, movement, and entry of moisture into sewers.   Availability of




moisture is included in the two-time dependent variables, API and RNY.




In addition, RNY introduces a time delay due to soil conditions affecting




movement of soil moisture.  Although important in preliminary analyses,




water table height above the sewer was eliminated in the final regression




analysis for Eq. A2 because of very low correlation.  The variables LEN,




CJOIT, and DIAM control moisture's ability to enter sewer pipe.  Results




of testing the preliminary infiltration equation on three subareas




studied by M&E were extremely helpful in testing the equation.  Specific




results from the comparison (see, for example, Figure A-l of the Glen




Street subarea, Berkeley, California) were that the preliminary predic-




tions consistently exceeded corresponding measurements on an average of




80 gpm (0.18 cfs) and failed to account for abrupt flow changes.  To




account for these discrepancies, additional developments led to the




approach described in Section 7.
                                   340

-------
        1*0 r-
:
      -40 *—
                                                                                           Predicted
       Source:  Metcalf  & Eddy,  Inc.,  "Storm Water Problems and Control,"  (Ref.
                 Figure A-l.  COMPARISON  OF  PREDICTED AND MEASURED INFILTRATION FLOWS M&E STUDY,
                              GLEN  STREET (BERKELEY,  CALIFORNIA) SUBAREA

-------
                               APPENDIX B

            DETAILED THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT  FOR DECAY MODEL



 SEWER QUALITY  ROUTING

 General Equation for Continuity of Mass
      Pounds  in
      element at
      new  time-step
             Pounds in
             element at
             old time-step
Pounds
entering
Pounds
leaving  —
                       Pounds         Pounds entering or
                       decayed or  +_ leaving  from
                       generated      source or sink
Notation for Eq. Bl

C      =  Cone, in element  (Ib/cf)        D

V      =  Volume in element (cf)          D     ••

n      =  Time-step                       S     ••

A      =  Cross-sectional area  (sq ft)    At    =

L      =  Length of conduit (ft)          WELL  =

SURGE  =  Volume stored during

          surcharging  (cf)


Expanding Eq. Bl with the above notation yields:
                                                                     (Bl)
                                         Decay rate

                                         Growth rate

                                         Maximum growth

                                         Time increment

                                         Volume stored in lift

                                         station wet well
(CV)

-------
By assuming complete mixing
                   (C   )  . = C  . and  (C  . )  = C                   (B3)
                    out n+1    n+1       out n    n
and substituting Eq. B3 into Eq. B2 and collecting terms,
 n+1   n+1        2            12        22
                                                         ]   •
        E(V   )           V          V 1

   /	2HL.D. _ At D  -£ - At D  -2-   +
    n      2           12       221




(C.  V.  )   + (C.  V.  )  ..            V  + V ..
  in in n	in in n+1    .         n    n+1
           -+ At D  S
Since
               t          out+1          At




 Multiplying  by  2/At Eq.  B4  then becomes:
              Cn+lVl  (2/At + Dl + V
Solving for C    yields:
             n+J.
   Cn+l  '  Cn VAt-  (D1+ D2» -  «Wn+  (Cin«in>n
                          D2 S(Vn + VlH/IV^Sl +  (°1 +  V
                                   344
                                                                     (B4)
          (V   )                          (V   )
            out n+1      .    ,         ,    out n  _   .     .           .  _.

                                                                     (B5)
        [5
        L r



      |Vn (2/At - Dx - D2)  - (Qout)nJ  +                   (B6)

-------
Eq. B7 becomes Eq. B8 by the following notation:


n             =  Old time-step, 1


n+1           =  New time-step, 2


j             =  Upstream point, 1, of element M


j+1           =  Downstream point, 2, of  element M


VOLl          =  Mixing volume, Vfi


VOL2          =  Mixing volume, ^n+^


DT            =  At


CPOLL         =  C

CPOLL(M,2,1)  =  Concentration  of a given pollutant in element M,


                 downstream and at the old  time-step



    CPOLL(M,2,2)  =  |cPOLL(M, 2,1)



                     D   (S)  (VOLl + VOL2) + CPOLL (M,1,1)Q(M, 1,1)  +
CPOLL(M,l,2)Q(M,l,2)J/rVOL2(jJ-+  ^



   ,2,2)1
                                                                     (B8)

                                                          + D  )  +
                      Q(M



Assumptions  and Properties  of the Various Hydraulic Elements in the
Transport Model


1.   Conduits:   L = length,  A = area



                                  (A.  _ + A.!,,  _)
                       VOLl   =  L
                                    345

-------
 2.   Manholes  and Flow Dividers
                          VOL1  =  SURGEIW




                          VOL2  =  SURGE2 (M)







 3.  Lift Stations







                          VOL1  =  WELLl(M)




                          VOL2  =  WELL2 (M)







 4.  Storage Units




    Quality routing is accomplished according to the procedure given




    in the Storage Model.







 SEDIMENT UPTAKE AND DEPOSITION MODEL




 The objective is to determine for each conduit in a general sewer system




 the quantity of sediment uptake and deposition under DWF and/or storm




 conditions.  Given input pollutographs for suspended solids and DWF/ for




 each time increment  DT,  let the average velocity of flow,  V,  needed




 to transport particles of diameter  d  in a sewer element,  M,  be




 defined as:
                      V  -         Rd                     (B9)
where  N   =  Manning's N for roughness




       R   =  Hydraulic radius




       d   =  Particle diameter




       k   =  Shields' magnitude of sediment characteristic




       ss  ~  Specific gravity of particle
                                   346

-------
Using Manning's formula for  V  we have
                                    R2/3 (S-)                       (BIO)
in which  N   =  Manning's N for roughness




          R   =  Hydraulic radius




          S1  =  Slope of invert of pipe (hydraulic energy line)






Setting Eqs. B9 and BIO equal and solving for  d,  then





                                     RS1
                                 k (Ss - 1)
                                                                   (BID
The above procedure is used to solve for the particle diameter,  d,




corresponding to the velocity in the sewer conduit.  For example/ given




the velocity (V) at any element in the sewer system for a specific time




increment (DT), there is a critical particle diameter (CRITD) related to




sediment uptake and a CRITD for deposition.






For sediment uptake, Case 1, that portion of sewer bed load that has a




particle diameter (PD) equal to or greater than the critical particle




diameter (PD >^ CRITD) will remain at the bottom of the sewer.  All




particles with PD < CRITD will be transported.  When dealing with




deposition, Case 2, particles with PD >^ CRITD will settle to the bottom




of the sewer element while particles with PD < CRITD will be transported




down the element.






A sieve analysis curve is used to describe sediment characteristics with-




in a sewer.  This curve was developed from data obtained in the APWA
                                   347

-------
report  (Ref. 8, Section 13).   The data were averaged to represent a




typical sieve analysis curve for sewer sediment.  The curve now being




used in QUAL is shown in Figure B-l.  Three straight lines are used to




approximate the plot.  However, if actual sieve analyses of sewer sedi-




ment are taken, this information should be used to replace the present




curve.  Also, an updating of the curve for Case 1 and Case 2 should be




considered along with a more detailed breakdown on suspended solids.






Eq. Bll is used to determine CRITD.  From the information available on




sewer sediment, an average  S   of 2.7 is assumed.  Shields' value for




k  is taken to equal .056 and the values for  S  are obtained from the




Transport Model.  The procedure used in calculating  R  is presented in




function RADH, the last section in this appendix.






Procedure for Suspended Solids




Step 1.  Calculate average velocity in each conduit.  This is general




         information since  V  is not used in Eq. Bll.




Step 2.  Calculate hydraulic radius as shown in function RADH.




Step 3.  Determine CRITD for Case 1 and CRITD for Case 2 using Eq. Bll.




Step 4.  Determine PCT1 and PCT2 using the equations representing




         Figure B-l.




Step 5.  Use the following equations to determine sediment uptake and




         deposition:






     SCOUR(M)  =  SCOUR(M)  + PCT2(TOTAL1 + TOTAL2 + TOTAL3)  (DT)    (B12)
                                   348

-------
 H
 U
       0.80-
       0.60-
                           A  PCT(1,2) = -1.2471(CRITD)
                                + 1.00 0 <_ CRITD £ .59
                           B  PCT(1,2) = -0.1501  (CRITD
                                + 0.3527   .59 < CRITD '_
                                2.0
                           C  PCT(1,2) = -0.00656(CRITD)
                                + 0.0656   2.0 < CD < 10.0
       0.40-
       0.20-
        0.00
           0.0
                                                                       10.0
                          PARTICLE DIAMETER  (MM),  CRITD

                Figure B-l.  SIEVE ANALYSIS  PLOT FOR SEWER SEDIMENT
     CPOLL(M,1,2,2)
       [(1 - PCT2)  (TOTAL1 + TOTAL2 +

       TOTALS)[/QI(M)  + (1-PCTl) SCOUR(M)/VOL2
                     SCOUR(M)
                 (PCT1) SCOUR(M)
                                                                    (B13)
(B14)
Step 6.  Use Eq. B2 for routing pollutant.
Definition of Variables
SCOUR (M)

CPOLL(M,N,O,IP)




PCT1, PCT2




DT

TOTAL1
             f settled sediment in sewer element M  (Ib)

=  Concentration of pollutant IP at sewer element M

   (lb/cf)

=  Fraction of sediment with diameter greater than  or

   equal to CRITD

=  Time increment

=  Sum of all pollutant flow rates from sewer elements

   immediately upstream (Ib/sec)
                                   349

-------
TOTAL2,TOT"\L3    =  Pollutant flow rate of incoming DWF and runoff,




                    respectively  (Ib/sec)




QI(M)            =  Input flow rate at element M  (cfs)




VOL2             =  Current volume of wastewater within each element




                    (cf).




M                =  Sewer element number




N                =  For inlet end of sewer element (=1), for outlet end




                    (=2)




0                =  Previous time-step (=1) or this time-step  (=2)




IP               =  Pollutants:  BOD(=1), SS(=2), COLIFORM(=3) and DO(=4)








Hydraulic Radius (Function RADH)




The objective is to compute the hydraulic radius of a given area of flow




in a conduit.  Let the hydraulic radius of a conduit be defined as:
                      i •     j-         Area of flow                 ,„,,-,
                Hydraulic radius  =  ———;	:—-—               (B15)
                 J                   wetted perimeter
Examples of the procedure used in calculating the hydraulic radius of a



circular conduit and a rectangular conduit are given in Figures B-2 and



B-3.  Similar procedures are used for a modified basket handle, rectang-



ular conduit with triangular bottom and rectangular conduit with round




bottom.  All other conduit shapes are found by calculating an equivalent



circular diameter and using the procedure given in Figure B-2.
                                  350

-------
where  AA
       D
       r
       d
        1
       s
       RADH
                       AA
         =  Area of flow
         =  Conduit diameter
         =  D/2
         =  Depth of flow

         =  Wetted perimeter
         =  Hydraulic radius
1)  For conduit flows less  than half  full:
         =  r - d.
    a)
b)  ^

c)  0/2  =  tan

d)  s    =  r0
                    - d.
                   -1
                       
 2)  For  conduit  flowing  over half full:
    a)   d2   =   d1  -  r

    b),c)  Same  as  in 1
    d)   s    =   2llr - r0
             =   r(2ll  - 0)

 3)  For  conduit  flowing  half full:
         s    =   Ilr

 4)  After wetted perimeter has been calculated, RADH = AA/s, Eq.  B15.
                  Figure B-2.   CIRCULAR CHANNEL SECTION
                                   351

-------
                                                                 -AA
   where  AA
          d
          L,
   1)
   2)
s

s

RADH
   Area of flow
   Conduit height
   Conduit width

   Depth of flow
   Wetted perimeter
'  Ll+2dl
=  AA/S,  Eq. B15.
          Figure B-3.   RECTANGULAR CHANNEL SECTION
. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1972 484-485/207 1-3
                                352

-------
1

5
Accession Number
2

s
Organization
Metcalf & Eddy
ibjet-l Fir
013B
, Inc.,
Id & Group
Palo
SELECTED WATER RESOURCES ABSTRACTS
INPUT TRANSACTION FORM
Alto, California
              Water Resources  Engineers,  Inc.,  Walnut Creek,  California
    Title
              STORM WATER MANAGEMENT MODEL
10
    Authors)
   Lager,  John A.,
   Pyatt,  Edwin E.,  and
   Shubinski,  Robert P.
16
21
Project Designation

 EPA Contract Nos. 14-12-501, 502, 503
    Note
     Set of four volumes: Volume I - Final Report,
     Volume II - Verification and Testing, Volume III
     User's Manual, Volume IV - Program Listing
    Citation
23
    Descriptors (Starred First)
   Water Quality Control*,  Computer Model*, Storm Water*, Simulation Analysis, Rainfall-
   Runoff Relationships,  Sewerage, Storage, Waste Water Treatment, Cost Benefit Analysis
25
    Identifiers (Starred First)
   Combined Sewer Overflows*, Urban Runoff
27
    Abstract
   A comprehensive mathematical model, capable of representing urban storm water runoff,
   has been developed to assist administrators and engineers  in  the  planning,  evaluation,
   and management of overflow abatement alternatives.  Hydrographs and pollutographs
   (time varying quality concentrations or mass values) were  generated for real storm
   events and systems from points of origin in real  time  sequence to points of disposal
   (including travel in receiving waters) with user  options for  intermediate storage
   and/or treatment facilities.  Both combined and separate sewerage systems may be
   evaluated.  Internal cost routines and receiving  water quality output assisted in
   direct cost-benefit analysis of alternate programs of  water quality enhancement.
   Demonstration and verification runs on selected catchments, varying in size from
   180 to 5,400 acres, in four U.S. cities  (approximately 20  storm events, total)  were
   used to test and debug the model.  The amount of  pollutants released varied
   significantly with the real time occurrence, runoff intensity duration, pre-storm
   history, land use, and maintenance.  Storage-treatment combinations offered best
   cost-effectiveness ratios.  A user's manual and complete program  listing were prepared.
"Abstractor
John A. Laqer
Institution
Proiect Manaa^r-. MPt-nal-F
K Rddi
fj Tr>^
ISi1" 
-------
Continued from inside front cover.,
11022 -

11023 -

11020 -

11023 -
-  08/67

-  09/67

--  12/67

-  05/68
11031 	 08/68
11030 DNS 01/69
11020 DIH 06/69
11020 DES 06/69
H020	06/69
11020 EXV 07/69

11020 DIG 08/69
11023 DPI 08/69
11020 DGZ 10/69
11020 EKO 10/69
11020 	 10/69
11024 FKN 11/69

11020 DWF 12/69
11000 	 01/70

11020 FKI 01/70

11024 DOK 02/70
11023 FDD 03/70

11024 DMS 05/70

11023 EVO 06/70
11024 	 06/70
11034 FKL 07/70
11022 DMU 07/70
11024 EJC 07/70

11020 	 08/70
11022 DMU 08/70

11023 	 08/70
11023 FIX 08/70
11024 EXF 08/70
Phase I - Feasibility of a Periodic Flushing System for
Combined Sewer Cleaning
Demonstrate Feasibility of the Use of Ultrasonic Filtration
in Treating the Overflows from Combined and/or Storm Sewers
Problems of Combined Sewer Facilities and Overflows, 1967
(WP-20-11)
Feasibility of a Stabilization-Retention Basin in Lake Erie
at Cleveland, Ohio
The Beneficial Use of Storm Water
Water Pollution Aspects of Urban Runoff, (WP-20-15)
Improved Sealants for Infiltration Control, (WP-20-18)
Selected Urban Storm Water Runoff Abstracts, (WP-20-21)
Sewer Infiltration Reduction by Zone Pumping, (DAST-9)
Strainer/Filter Treatment of Combined Sewer Overflows,
(WP-20-16)
Polymers for Sewer Flow Control, (WP-20-22)
Rapid-Flow Filter for Sewer Overflows
Design of a Combined Sewer Fluidic Regulator, (DAST-13)
Combined Sewer Separation Using Pressure Sewers, (ORD-4)
Crazed Resin Filtration of Combined Sewer Overflows,  (DAST-4)
Stream Pollution and Abatement from Combined Sewer Overflows •
Bucyrus, Ohio, (DAST-32)
Control of Pollution by Underwater Storage
Storm and Combined Sewer Demonstration Projects -
January 1970
Dissolved Air Flotation Treatment of Combined Sewer
Overflows, (WP-20-17)
Proposed Combined Sewer Control by Electrode Potential
Rotary Vibratory Fine Screening of Combined Sewer Overflows,
(DAST-5)
Engineering Investigation of Sewer Overflow Problem -
Roanoke, Virginia
Micros training and Disinfection of Combined Sewer Overflows
Combined Sewer Overflow Abatement Technology
Storm Water Pollution from Urban Land Activity
Combined Sewer Regulator Overflow Facilities
Selected Urban Storm Water Abstracts, July 1968 -
June 1970
Combined Sewer Overflow Seminar Papers
Combined Sewer Regulation and Management - A Manual of
Practice
Retention Basin Control of Combined Sewer Overflows
Conceptual Engineering Report - Kingman Lake Project
Combined Sewer Overflow Abatement Alternatives -
Washington, B.C.

-------